MCS Electronics , 1995-2013

BASCOM-8051 user manual

Introduction
by MCS Electronics

Dear reader. Thank you for your interest in BASCOM. BASCOM was "invented" in 1995. It was intended for personal usage only. I decided to make it public as I found no other tool that was so simple to use. Since that time, a lot of options and extensions were added. Without the help and patience of the many users, BASCOM would not be what it is today : "the best and most affordable tool for fast proto typing". We hope that BASCOM will contribute in making your work with microprocessors Easy and enjoyable. The MCS Electronics Team

BASCOM-8051
2013 MCS Electronics
All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without the written permission of the publisher. Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of the respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document. Printed: oktober 2013 in (whereever you are located)

Publisher MCS Electronics Managing Editor M.C.Alberts Technical Editors M.C.Alberts

Special thanks to: All the people who contributed to this document, all the forum members that contributed in a positive way, all beta testers , and all customers.

Cover Designer B.F.de Graaff

BASCOM-8051

Table of Contents
Foreword 0

Part I INDEX

13

1 Table of contents ................................................................................................................................... 14 2 Keyword................................................................................................................................... Reference 17

Part II Installing BASCOM-8051 Part III Updates Part IV BASCOM IDE

21 27 37

1 RUNNING ................................................................................................................................... BASCOM-8051 37 2 BASCOM ................................................................................................................................... IDE 38 3 File New ................................................................................................................................... 39 4 File Open ................................................................................................................................... 39 5 File Close ................................................................................................................................... 40 6 File Save................................................................................................................................... 40 7 File Save................................................................................................................................... As... 40 8 File Print................................................................................................................................... Preview 40 9 File Print................................................................................................................................... 41 10 File Exit ................................................................................................................................... 41 11 Edit Undo ................................................................................................................................... 42 12 Edit Redo ................................................................................................................................... 42 13 Edit Copy ................................................................................................................................... 42 14 Edit Cut ................................................................................................................................... 42 15 Edit Paste ................................................................................................................................... 43 16 Edit Find................................................................................................................................... 43 17 Edit Find................................................................................................................................... Next 43 18 Edit Replace ................................................................................................................................... 44 19 Edit Goto ................................................................................................................................... 44 20 Edit Indent ................................................................................................................................... Block 45 21 Edit Unindent ................................................................................................................................... Block 45 22 Editor Keys ................................................................................................................................... 46 23 Program ................................................................................................................................... Compile 47 24 Program ................................................................................................................................... Syntax check 47 25 Program ................................................................................................................................... Show Result 48 26 Program ................................................................................................................................... Simulate 49 27 Program ................................................................................................................................... Send to chip 52 28 Tools Terminal ................................................................................................................................... Emulator 53 29 Tools LCD ................................................................................................................................... designer 54

2013 MCS Electronics

Contents

30 Tools Graphic ................................................................................................................................... Converter 54 31 Tools LIB ................................................................................................................................... Manager 55 32 Tools Triscent ................................................................................................................................... Converter 56 33 Tools Export ................................................................................................................................... to RTF 57 34 Options Compiler ................................................................................................................................... Output 57 35 Options Compiler ................................................................................................................................... Communication 58 36 Options Compiler ................................................................................................................................... I2C 58 37 Options Compiler ................................................................................................................................... LCD 59 38 Options Compiler ................................................................................................................................... Misc 60 39 Options Communication ................................................................................................................................... 60 40 Options Environment ................................................................................................................................... 62 41 Options hardware ................................................................................................................................... simulator 64 42 Options Programmer ................................................................................................................................... 64 43 Options Monitor ................................................................................................................................... 65 44 Options Printer ................................................................................................................................... 66 45 Window cascade ................................................................................................................................... 66 46 Window Tile ................................................................................................................................... 67 47 Window arrange ................................................................................................................................... icons 67 48 Window minimize ................................................................................................................................... all 67 49 Help About ................................................................................................................................... 67 50 Help Index ................................................................................................................................... 67 51 Help on help ................................................................................................................................... 67 52 Help Shop ................................................................................................................................... 68 53 Help Forum ................................................................................................................................... 68 54 Help Support ................................................................................................................................... 68 55 Help Credits ................................................................................................................................... 68

Part V Language fundamentals Part VI BASCOM Language Reference

2 #IF 3 #ELSE 5 1WIRE

70 77

1 Language ................................................................................................................................... fundamentals 70

1 BASCOM ................................................................................................................................... Statements 77 ................................................................................................................................... 80 ................................................................................................................................... 81 ................................................................................................................................... 83

4 #ENDIF ................................................................................................................................... 82 6 1WIRECOUNT ................................................................................................................................... 84 7 1WSEARCHFIRST ................................................................................................................................... 85 8 1WSEARCHNEXT ................................................................................................................................... 87 9 $ASM - $END ................................................................................................................................... ASM 88 10 $BAUD ................................................................................................................................... 89 11 $BGF ................................................................................................................................... 90 12 $CRYSTAL ................................................................................................................................... 92

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM-8051 13 $DEFAULT ................................................................................................................................... XRAM 92 14 $EXTERNAL ................................................................................................................................... 93 15 $INCLUDE ................................................................................................................................... 93 16 $IRAMSTART ................................................................................................................................... 94 17 $LARGE ................................................................................................................................... 94 18 $LIB 19 $LCD 21 $MAP ................................................................................................................................... 95 ................................................................................................................................... 95 ................................................................................................................................... 97

20 $LCDRS ................................................................................................................................... 96 22 $NOBREAK ................................................................................................................................... 97 23 $NOINIT ................................................................................................................................... 98 24 $NONAN................................................................................................................................... 98 25 $NONULL ................................................................................................................................... 99 26 $NORAMCLEAR ................................................................................................................................... 99 27 $NOSP ................................................................................................................................... 100 28 $OBJ ................................................................................................................................... 100 29 $RAMSIZE ................................................................................................................................... 101 30 $RAMTRON ................................................................................................................................... 101 31 $RAMSTART ................................................................................................................................... 103 32 $REGFILE ................................................................................................................................... 104 33 $ROMSTART ................................................................................................................................... 104 34 $SERIALINPUT ................................................................................................................................... 105 35 $SERIALINPUT2LCD ................................................................................................................................... 105 36 $SERIALOUTPUT ................................................................................................................................... 106 37 $SIM ................................................................................................................................... 107 38 $TIMEOUT ................................................................................................................................... 107 39 $WAIT ................................................................................................................................... 108 40 ALIAS ................................................................................................................................... 108 41 ABS 42 ASC 43 AVG 45 BCD ................................................................................................................................... 109 ................................................................................................................................... 110 ................................................................................................................................... 110 ................................................................................................................................... 112

44 BAUD ................................................................................................................................... 111 46 BITWAIT ................................................................................................................................... 112 47 BREAK ................................................................................................................................... 113 48 CALL 49 CHR 50 CLS ................................................................................................................................... 113 ................................................................................................................................... 114 ................................................................................................................................... 115

51 CONST ................................................................................................................................... 116 52 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... 116 53 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... 1WIRE 117 54 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... ADUC812 117

2013 MCS Electronics

Contents

55 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... BAUD 119 56 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... BAUD1 119 57 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... DEBOUNCE 120 58 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... I2CDELAY 120 59 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... GETRC 121 60 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... GRAPHLCD 121 61 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... LCDPIN 125 62 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... LCD 125 63 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... LCDBUS 126 64 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... MICROWIRE 127 65 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... PRINT 127 66 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... SCL 128 67 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... SDA 128 68 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... SERVOS 129 69 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... SPI 130 70 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... TIMER0, TIMER1 131 71 CONFIG ................................................................................................................................... WATCHDOG 132 72 COUNTER ................................................................................................................................... 132 73 CPEEK ................................................................................................................................... 134 74 CURSOR ................................................................................................................................... 135 75 DATA ................................................................................................................................... 136 76 DEBOUNCE ................................................................................................................................... 137 77 DECR ................................................................................................................................... 138 78 DECLARE ................................................................................................................................... 139 79 DEF ................................................................................................................................... 140 80 DEFLCDCHAR ................................................................................................................................... 140 81 DELAY ................................................................................................................................... 141 82 DIM ................................................................................................................................... 141 83 DISABLE ................................................................................................................................... 143 84 DISPLAY ................................................................................................................................... 143 85 DO 86 ELSE 88 END ................................................................................................................................... 144 ................................................................................................................................... 144 ................................................................................................................................... 146

87 ENABLE ................................................................................................................................... 145 89 END IF ................................................................................................................................... 146 90 ERASE ................................................................................................................................... 147 91 EXIT 92 FOR ................................................................................................................................... 148 ................................................................................................................................... 148

93 FOURTHLINE ................................................................................................................................... 149 94 FUSING................................................................................................................................... 150 95 GET ................................................................................................................................... 151 96 GETAD ................................................................................................................................... 152

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM-8051 97 GETAD2051 ................................................................................................................................... 153 98 GETRC ................................................................................................................................... 158 99 GETRC5 ................................................................................................................................... 160 100 GOSUB................................................................................................................................... 162 101 GOTO ................................................................................................................................... 163 102 HEX 104 HIGH ................................................................................................................................... 163 ................................................................................................................................... 164 103 HEXVAL ................................................................................................................................... 164 105 HIGHW ................................................................................................................................... 165 106 HOME ................................................................................................................................... 166 107 I2CRECEIVE ................................................................................................................................... 166 108 I2CSEND ................................................................................................................................... 167 109 I2C 110 IDLE 111 IF 112 INCR 114 INP ................................................................................................................................... 168 ................................................................................................................................... 169 ................................................................................................................................... 169 ................................................................................................................................... 171 ................................................................................................................................... 173

113 INKEY ................................................................................................................................... 171 115 INPUT ................................................................................................................................... 173 116 INPUTBIN ................................................................................................................................... 175 117 INPUTHEX ................................................................................................................................... 176 118 INSTR ................................................................................................................................... 177 119 LCASE ................................................................................................................................... 178 120 LCD ................................................................................................................................... 178 121 LCDINIT ................................................................................................................................... 181 122 LCDHEX ................................................................................................................................... 182 123 LEFT 124 LEN ................................................................................................................................... 183 ................................................................................................................................... 183

125 LOAD ................................................................................................................................... 184 126 LOCATE ................................................................................................................................... 185 127 LOOKUP ................................................................................................................................... 185 128 LOOKUPSTR ................................................................................................................................... 186 129 LOW ................................................................................................................................... 187 130 LOWW ................................................................................................................................... 188 131 LOWERLINE ................................................................................................................................... 188 132 MAKEBCD ................................................................................................................................... 189 133 MAKEDEC ................................................................................................................................... 189 134 MAKEINT ................................................................................................................................... 190 135 MAX 136 MID 137 MIN 138 MOD ................................................................................................................................... 190 ................................................................................................................................... 191 ................................................................................................................................... 192 ................................................................................................................................... 192

2013 MCS Electronics

Contents

139 MWINIT................................................................................................................................... 193 140 MWREAD ................................................................................................................................... 193 141 MWWOPCODE ................................................................................................................................... 194 142 MWWRITE ................................................................................................................................... 195 143 NEXT ................................................................................................................................... 196 144 ON interrupt ................................................................................................................................... 196 145 ON value ................................................................................................................................... 197 146 OPEN ................................................................................................................................... 198 147 OUT ................................................................................................................................... 200 148 PORT ................................................................................................................................... 201 149 PEEK ................................................................................................................................... 202 150 POKE ................................................................................................................................... 202 151 POWERDOWN ................................................................................................................................... 203 152 PRINT ................................................................................................................................... 203 153 PRINTBIN ................................................................................................................................... 204 154 PRINTHEX ................................................................................................................................... 205 155 PRIORITY ................................................................................................................................... 206 156 PSET 157 PUT ................................................................................................................................... 207 ................................................................................................................................... 207

158 READ ................................................................................................................................... 208 159 READMAGCARD ................................................................................................................................... 209 160 REM ................................................................................................................................... 211 161 REPLACE ................................................................................................................................... 211 162 RESET ................................................................................................................................... 212 163 RESTORE ................................................................................................................................... 212 164 RETURN ................................................................................................................................... 213 165 RIGHT ................................................................................................................................... 214 166 RND ................................................................................................................................... 214 167 ROTATE ................................................................................................................................... 215 168 SELECT ................................................................................................................................... 216 169 SET ................................................................................................................................... 216 170 SHIFTCURSOR ................................................................................................................................... 217 171 SHIFT ................................................................................................................................... 217 172 SHIFTIN ................................................................................................................................... 218 173 SHIFTLCD ................................................................................................................................... 219 174 SHOWPIC ................................................................................................................................... 220 175 SOUND ................................................................................................................................... 220 176 SOUNDEXT ................................................................................................................................... 221 177 SPACE ................................................................................................................................... 222 178 SPC 179 SPIIN ................................................................................................................................... 223 ................................................................................................................................... 224

180 SPIINIT ................................................................................................................................... 224

2013 MCS Electronics

10

BASCOM-8051 181 SPIOUT................................................................................................................................... 225 182 START ................................................................................................................................... 225 183 STOP ................................................................................................................................... 226 184 STOP Timer ................................................................................................................................... 226 185 STR 187 SUB ................................................................................................................................... 228 ................................................................................................................................... 229 186 STRING................................................................................................................................... 228 188 SWAP ................................................................................................................................... 230 189 THIRDLINE ................................................................................................................................... 230 190 UCASE ................................................................................................................................... 231 191 UPPERLINE ................................................................................................................................... 232 192 VAL 194 WAIT ................................................................................................................................... 232 ................................................................................................................................... 233 193 VARPTR ................................................................................................................................... 233 195 WAITKEY ................................................................................................................................... 234 196 WAITMS ................................................................................................................................... 234 197 WAITMSE ................................................................................................................................... 235 198 WATCHDOG ................................................................................................................................... 235 199 WHILE .. ................................................................................................................................... WEND 236

Part VII Using assembly

239

1 Using assemly ................................................................................................................................... 239 2 Internal ................................................................................................................................... registers 246 3 Initialization ................................................................................................................................... 248

Part VIII Additional Hardware

251

1 Additional ................................................................................................................................... Hardware 251 2 Alternative ................................................................................................................................... port-pin functions 256 3 Hardware ................................................................................................................................... - LCD display 257 4 Hardware ................................................................................................................................... - I2C 258 5 1WIRE INFO ................................................................................................................................... 258

Part IX Supported Programmers

264

1 MCS Flash ................................................................................................................................... programmer 264 2 MCS SPI ................................................................................................................................... programmer 266 3 Blow IT ................................................................................................................................... Flashprogrammer 267 4 PG2051................................................................................................................................... flash programmer 267 5 PG302 programmer ................................................................................................................................... 268 6 SE512 or ................................................................................................................................... SE514 programmer 269 7 SE-812 ................................................................................................................................... 270 8 Sample ................................................................................................................................... Electronics ISP programmer 270 9 CYGNAL ................................................................................................................................... JTAG Programmer 272 10 Futurelec ................................................................................................................................... 272

2013 MCS Electronics

Contents

11

11 JPK Systems ................................................................................................................................... X-programmer 272 12 Peter Averill's ................................................................................................................................... TAFE programmer 273 13 STK200/300 ................................................................................................................................... ISP Programmer 274 14 Rhombus ................................................................................................................................... SCE-51 275 15 SE511-SE516 ................................................................................................................................... programmer 276

Part X BASCOM Misc

279

1 Error messages ................................................................................................................................... 279 2 Compiler ................................................................................................................................... Limits 282 3 Reserved ................................................................................................................................... Words 283

Part XI Microprocessor support

288

1 Microprocessor ................................................................................................................................... support 288 2 TIMER2................................................................................................................................... 289 3 DATA EEPROM ................................................................................................................................... 292 4 AT898252 ................................................................................................................................... WATCHDOG 292 5 WATCHDOG ................................................................................................................................... 80515 293 6 INTERRUPTS ................................................................................................................................... and PRIORITY 80515 293 7 INTERRUPTS ................................................................................................................................... and PRIORITY 80537 294 8 ADUC 812 ................................................................................................................................... 294 9 89C51 ................................................................................................................................... 297

Part XII International Resellers Part XIII Third party hardware

300 302
302 309

1 International ................................................................................................................................... Resellers 300

1 Third party ................................................................................................................................... Hardware 302

Grifo ......................................................................................................................................................... Rhombus .........................................................................................................................................................

Index

311

2013 MCS Electronics

Part

INDEX

13

INDEX

1995-2013 MCS Electronics Help Version 2.0.16.0 See Installing BASCOM-8051

21

for the installation procedure

MCS Electronics may update this documentation without notice. Products specification and usage may change accordingly. MCS Electronics will not be liable for any miss-information or errors found in this document. All software provided with this product package is provided 'AS IS' without any warranty expressed or implied. MCS Electronics will not be liable for any damages, costs or loss of profits arising from the usage of this product package. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without written permission of MCS Electronics.

MCS Electronics. All rights reserved.

2013 MCS Electronics

14

BASCOM-8051

1.1

Table of contents
Installing BASCOM-8051 BASCOM IDE
38 37 21

Running BASCOM 8051 Updates 27

File
File New As... 40 File Print
39

, File Open

39

, File Close
40

40

, File Save
41

40

, File Save

41

, File Print Preview

, File Exit

Edit
Edit Undo
43 42

, Edit Redo

42

, Edit Copy

42

, Edit Cut
44

42

, Edit Paste
46

Edit Find 43 , Edit Find Next 43 , Edit Replace Goto 44 , Edit Indent 45 , Edit Unindent 45

, Editor Keys

, Edit

Program
Compile to chip
47

, Syntax check

47

, Show Result

48

, Simulate

49

, Send

52

Tools
Terminal Emulator , Export to RTF 57
53

, LCD designer

54

, Graphic Converter

54

, LIB Manager

55

Options
Compiler Output LCD 59 Compiler Misc.
60 57

, Compiler Communication
60

58

, Compiler I2C
62

58

, Compiler

, Communication
64

, Environment
64

Hardware Simulator

, Programmer

, Monitor

65

, Printer

66

Window
Cascade
66

, Tile

67

, Arrange Icons

67

, Minimize all

67

Help
About
68 67

, Index

67

, Help on Help

67

, Credits

68

, Forum

68

, Shop

68

, Support

BASCOM Statements Internal Registers Initialization

248 246

77 70

Language Fundamentals

2013 MCS Electronics

INDEX Microprocessor support Reserved Words Errors

279 52 251 283 288

15

Programmers

Additional hardware Compiler limits

282

ASM programming

239 300 302

International Resellers

Available third party hardware

Language Reference -11WRESET, 1WREAD, 1WWRITE 1WIRECOUNT 84

83

, 1WSEARCHFIRST

85

, 1WSEARCHNEXT

87

-COMPILER DIRECTIVES#IF 80 , #ELSE 81 , #ENDIF 82 , $ASM - $END ASM 88 ,$INCLUDE 93 , $BAUD 89 , $BGF 90 , $CRYSTAL 92 , $DEFAULT XRAM 92 , $IRAMSTART 94 , $LARGE 94 , $LCD 95 , $MAP 97 , $NOBREAK 97 , $NOINIT 98 , $NONAN 98 , $NONULL 99 , $NORAMCLEAR 99 , $NOSP 100 , $OBJ 100 , $RAMSIZE 101 , $RAMSTART 103 , $REGFILE 104 , $ROMSTART 104 , $SERIALINPUT 105 , $SERIALINPUT2LCD 105 , $SERIALOUTPUT 106 , $SIM 107

-AABS
109

, ALIAS

108

, ASC

110

, AVG

110

-BBITWAIT
112

, BCD

112

, BREAK

113

-CCALL 113 , CLOSE 198 , CLS CPEEK 134 , CURSOR 135

115

, CHR

114

, CONFIG

116

, CONST

116

,COUNTER

132

-DDATA 136 , DEBOUNCE 137 , DECR 138 , DECLARE 139 , DEFINT 140 , DEFBIT 140 , DEFBYTE 140 , DEFLCDCHAR 140 , DEFWORD 140 , DELAY 141 , DIM 141 , DISABLE DISPLAY 143 , DO 144
143

-EELSE
144

, ENABLE

145

, END

146

, END IF

146

, ERASE

147

, EXIT

148

-FFOR
148

, FOURTHLINE

149

, FUSING

150

2013 MCS Electronics

16

BASCOM-8051

-GGET
151

, GETAD

152

, GETAD2051

153

, GETRC

158

, GETRC5

160

, GOSUB

162

, GOTO

163

-HHEX
163

, HEXVAL

164

, HIGH

164

, HIGHW

165

, HOME

166

-II2CRECEIVE 166 , I2CSEND 167 , I2CSTART 168 , I2CSTOP 168 , I2CRBYTE 168 , I2CWBYTE 168 , IDLE 169 , IF 169 , INCR 171 , INKEY 171 , INP 173 , INPUT 173 , INPUTBIN 175 , INPUTHEX 176 , INSTR 177

-LLCASE 178 , LCD 178 , LCDINIT 181 , LCDHEX 182 , LEFT 183 , LEN 183 , LOAD 184 , LOCATE 185 , LOOKUP 185 , LOOKUPSTR 186 , LOOP 144 , LOW 187 , LOWW 188 , LOWERLINE 188

-MMAKEDEC
189

, MAKEBCD

189

, MAKEINT

190

, MAX

190

, MID

191

, MIN

192

, MOD

192

-NNEXT
196

-OON Interrupt
196

, ON Value

197

, OPEN

198

, OUT

200

-PP1,P3 201 , PEEK 202 , POKE , PRINTHEX 205 , PRIORITY

202 206

, PSET 207 , POWERDOWN , PUT 207

203

, PRINT

203

, PRINTBIN

204

-RREAD 208 , READMAGCARD 209 , REM 211 , REPLACE RETURN 213 , RIGHT 214 , RND 214 , ROTATE 215
211

, RESET

212

, RESTORE

212

-SSELECT 216 , SET 216 , SHIFT 217 , SHIFTCURSOR 217 , SHIFTIN 218 , SHIFTOUT 218 , SHIFTLCD 219 , SHOWPIC 220 , SOUND 220 , SOUNDEXT 221 , SPACE 222 , SPC 223 , SPIIN 224 , SPIOUT 225 , START 225 , STOP 226 , STOP TIMER 226 , STR 228 , STRING 228 , SUB 229 , SWAP 230

-TTHEN
169

, THIRDLINE

230

, TO

148

-UUCASE
231

, UPPERLINE

232

-VVAL
232

, VARPTR

233

2013 MCS Electronics

INDEX

17

-WWAIT
233

, WAITKEY

234

, WAITMS

234

, WAITMSE

235

, WHILE .. WEND

236

1.2

Keyword Reference 1WIRE

1Wire routines allow you to communicate with Dallas 1wire chips. 1WRESET, 1WREAD, 1WWRITE 83 , 1WSEARCHFIRST 85 , 1WSEARCHNEXT 1WIRECOUNT 84
87

Conditions
Conditions execute a part of the program depending on the condition IF 169 , ELSE 144 , END IF 146 , EXIT 148 , DO 144 , LOOP 144 , SELECT 216 , FOR 196 , TO 148 , THEN 169 , WHILE .. WEND 236
148

, NEXT

Configuration
Configuration command initialize the hardware to the desired state. CONFIG 116

Conversion
A conversion routine is a function that converts a number or string. ASC 110 , BCD 112 , CHR 114 , FUSING 150 , HEX 163 , HEXVAL 164 , HIGH 164 , HIGHW MAKEDEC 189 , MAKEBCD 189 , MAKEINT 190 , STR 228 , VAL 232
165

Delay
Delay routines delay the program for the specified time. DELAY 141 , WAIT 233 , WAITMS 234

Directives
Directives are special instructions for the compiler. They can override a setting from the IDE. #IF 80 , #ELSE 81 , #ENDIF 82 , $ASM - $END ASM 88 ,$INCLUDE 93 , $BAUD 89 , $BGF 90 , $CRYSTAL 92 , $DEFAULT XRAM 92 , $IRAMSTART 94 , $LARGE 94 , $LCD 95 , $MAP 97 , $NOBREAK 97 , $NOINIT 98 , $NONAN 98 , $NONULL 99 , $NORAMCLEAR 99 , $NOSP 100 , $OBJ 100 , $RAMSIZE 101 , $RAMSTART 103 , $REGFILE 104 , $ROMSTART 104 , $SERIALINPUT 105 , $SERIALINPUT2LCD 105 , $SERIALOUTPUT 106 , $SIM 107

Graphical LCD
Graphical LCD commands extend the normal text LCD commands. PSET 207 , SHOWPIC 220

I2C
2013 MCS Electronics

18

BASCOM-8051 I2C commands allow you to communicate with I2C chips with the TWI hardware or with emulated I2C hardware. I2CRECEIVE 166 , I2CSEND 167 , I2CSTART 168 , I2CSTOP 168 , I2CRBYTE 168 , I2CWBYTE 168

Interrups
Interrupt related routines. ON Interrupt 196 , ENABLE 145 , DISABLE
143

, PRIORITY

206

IO
I/O commands are related to the I/O pins of the processor. ALIAS 108 , BITWAIT 112 , DEBOUNCE 137 , SET 216 , RESET 212

Math
Math functions ABS 109 , AVG 110 , MAX
190

, MIN

192

, MOD

192

Micro
Micro statements are highly related to the micro processor. BREAK 113 , P1,P3 201 , IDLE 169 , END 146 , POWERDOWN 203 , START STOP TIMER 226
225

, STOP

226

Memory
Memory functions set or read RAM , EEPROM or flash memory. CPEEK 134 , ERASE 147 , INP 173 , OUT 200 , PEEK 202 , POKE 202 , DIM RESTORE 212 , DATA 136 , VARPTR 233
141

, READ

208

Remote control
Remote control statements send or receive IR commands for remote control. GETRC5
160

RS-232
RS-232 are serial routines that use the UART or emulate a UART. WAITKEY 234 , PRINT 203 , PRINTBIN 204 , PRINTHEX 205 , PUT 207 , OPEN 198 ,SPC INKEY 171 , INPUT 173 , INPUTBIN 175 , INPUTHEX 176 , GET 151 , CLOSE 198
223

SPI
SPI routines communicate according to the SPI protocol with either hardware SPI or software emulated SPI. SPIIN 224 , SPIOUT 225 , SPIINIT 224

String
String routines are used to manipulate strings.

2013 MCS Electronics

INDEX MID 191 , LCASE 178 , INSTR 211 , SPACE 222 , UCASE 231
177

19

, LEFT

183

, LEN

183

, RIGHT

214

, STRING

228

, REPLACE

Text LCD
Text LCD routines work with the normal text based LCD displays. CLS
182

, CURSOR 135 , FOURTHLINE 149 , HOME 166 , LCD 178 , LCDINIT 181 , LCDHEX , LOCATE 185 , SHIFTLCD 219 , SHIFTCURSOR 217 ,DISPLAY 143 , LOWERLINE 188 , UPPERLINE 232 , THIRDLINE 230
115

Various
This section contains all statements that were hard to put into another group CALL 113 , CONST 116 , COUNTER 132 , DECR 138 , DECLARE 139 , DEFINT 140 , DEFBIT 140 ,DEFBYTE 140 , DEFLCDCHAR 140 , DEFWORD 140 , GETAD 152 , GETAD2051 153 , GETRC 158 , , GOSUB 162 , GOTO 163 , INCR 171 , LOAD 184 , LOOKUP 185 , LOOKUPSTR 186 , LOW 187 , LOWW 188 , ON Value 197 , READMAGCARD 209 , REM 211 , RETURN 213 , RND 214 , ROTATE 215 , SHIFT 217 , SHIFTIN 218 , SHIFTOUT 218 , SOUND 220 , SUB 229 , SWAP 230

2013 MCS Electronics

Part

II

Installing BASCOM-8051

21

Installing BASCOM-8051
After you have downloaded the software you need to UNZIP the downloaded file. There is only one file named setup.exe You may run this setup.exe from within the Windows Shell but it is important to notice that when you use the commercial version, you MUST UNZIP the setup.exe since you need to copy the license file to the same directory as setup.exe. You must have Administrator rights in order to be able to run setup.

The opening screen looks like :

You need to click the Next-button to continue. A license agreement will be shown. You need to read it and accept the agreement. This is a no-nonsense agreement where you are allowed to install/copy on as many computers as you want, providing that you use only one computer at the same time.

2013 MCS Electronics

22

BASCOM-8051

After clicking the 'I accept the agreeement' option, you need to click the Nextbutton again to continue. The readme.txt file is shown. Basicly it tells you to contact [email protected] in case of a problem.

Click the Next-button again to continue with the setup.

2013 MCS Electronics

Installing BASCOM-8051 You can now select where you want to Install BASCOM-8051. The default is shown below.

23

Click the Next-button again to continue. You can now select/enter the Program Group name. The default is shown below.

Click the Next-button again to continue.

2013 MCS Electronics

24

BASCOM-8051 The files will now be installed. A screenshot is shown below :

When the files are installed, the installer will install some addiitonal files :

Press the Next-Button to install the additional files. This will go quick in most cases. When you install from CD-ROM the setup will also copy PDF datasheets. The installation will take longer then.

2013 MCS Electronics

Installing BASCOM-8051

25

When setup is completely finished it will show the last screen :

You MUST reboot your PC since it will install a driver needed for the programming.

2013 MCS Electronics

Part

III

Updates

27

Updates
The update process is simple. Go to the main MCS website at http://www.mcselec.com In the left pane under 'Main Menu' you will find a link named 'Registration/ Updates'

Notice that the website uses two different accounts : one for the forum/shop and one for the registration/updates. You will see the following screen:

2013 MCS Electronics

28

BASCOM-8051

Click the link and select 'Create new account'

You need to provide a username, password, email and full name. Company name is optional. When you want to receive notifications when updates are available, select this option. When you filled in the information, click 'Submit Registration'. After you click submit, you can get various error messages. For example that a username already exists. Press the Back-button in your browser, and correct the error, then try again If the registration is successful you will get a message that the registration succeeded. Now you can login. You will see the following screen :

2013 MCS Electronics

Updates

29

You need to chose 'Product registration'. The following screen will be shown:

Select a product from the list. Enter the serial number It is important that you enter a valid serial number. Do not try to enter serial numbers from cracked versions. When you enter invalid serial numbers, you will loose support and the ability to update. The valid serial number is shown in the Help, About box.

2013 MCS Electronics

30

BASCOM-8051

When the product is selected, the serial number is entered, and you press 'Register product' you will see the following message :

This does mean that you registered successfully. MCS Electronics will validate all registrations once in a few days. When the product is validated you will receive an email. After you receive the email, you can login to the register again. Now you need to select 'Download LIC files'. The following screen will be shown:

2013 MCS Electronics

Updates

31

At the top you can see which products are registered, and which status they have. When you want to do a FULL SETUP, you need to download the full version. You do not need to uninstall a previous version. You can install an update into the same directory or a new directory. You can also order the same update on CD-ROM. You will be directed to the on line shop. Notice that the shop uses a different account/username The ZIP file you download contains only one setup.exe. You need to run this executable. It is also important that you put the license DLL into the same directory as setup. exe Setup will copy this file to the bascom application directory. You can also manual copy this file. The license file is on CD-ROM, diskette, or the media (email) you received it on. It is only supplied once. Without the file, bascom will not run. The file is named bsc5132L.DLL for BASCOM-8051 and bscavrL.DLL for BASCOMAVR When you got the license by email, it was zipped and probably had a different extension. Consult the original installation instructions. The file is only provided once, we can not, and do not provide it again. See Installing BASCOM
21

on how to do a full install.

It is also possible to do a partial update. For example to update some DAT files, or to update to a beta which is only available as an update. For partial updates, you need the Update Wiz.

2013 MCS Electronics

32

BASCOM-8051

When you do not have the Update Wiz, you can download it. Unzip it to the same directory as BASCOM. The Update Wiz uses LIC files which you can download. A LIC file is a text file, it is not the LICENSE DLL ! Store the downloaded LIC file in the same directory as the Update Wiz. When you store the Update Wiz into the same directory as BASCOM, the license DLL already exist there. When you put the Update Wiz and the LIC files into a separate directory, you need to copy the BASCOM license DLL to this directory too. When you run the Update Wiz, it will check for a new version and will download this if available. It will then run again.

2013 MCS Electronics

Updates

33

When the Update Wiz finds a LIC file, it will check if the update/install location is specified. For new downloaded LIC files, the update wiz does not know the update directory, and will ask for the directory you want to update. This can be any (new) directory, but usually is the BASCOM application directory.

After you click Ok, the directory to update is stored in the LIC file. It will not be asked again.

Click the Next button to start the update. It depends on the downloaded LIC files how many products are found. You will get a similar window :

2013 MCS Electronics

34

BASCOM-8051

You need to select the product that you want to update. In the sample there is only 1 choice. Press the Next-button to continue. The Wiz will compare files on the web with your local files in the specified directory.

When it finds packages that are newer, they will be shown in a list. By default they are all selected. You can unselect the packages you do not want to update. Press Next to download the selected packages.

2013 MCS Electronics

Updates

35

During the download you will see the history file. When all packages are downloaded, they will be installed/unzipped. Press the Next-button to install the downloaded files.

During the installation you will see the progress. When installation is ready, you need to press the Finish-button. The Wiz can also backup all files it will replace.

2013 MCS Electronics

Part

IV

BASCOM IDE

37

4
4.1

BASCOM IDE
RUNNING BASCOM-8051
When you run BASCOM-8051 the following window will appear.

The last saved/closed program will be loaded automatic. When reformatting is enabled, the loaded program will be reformatted too. This is only meaningful for programs written with another editor. The BASCOM IDE is a so-called multi document application. This means that you can open more than one source file. The operations that you perform are always done on the current document, that is, the window with the focus. The filename is shown in the caption of the window. The status bar is separated in four panels. line, character position indicator modified indicator, to indicate that text has changed insert/overwrite indicator message panel

Some actions such as programming will make a progress indicator visible.

2013 MCS Electronics

38

BASCOM-8051

4.2

BASCOM IDE
Running BASCOM 8051
37

File
File New File Open File Close File Save File Print File Exit
39 39 40 40 40

File Save As...

41

File Print Preview

41

40

Edit
Edit Undo Edit Redo Edit Copy Edit Cut
42 43 42 42 42

Edit Paste Edit Find

43 43

Edit Find Next Edit Replace

44

Editor Keys

46

Program
Compile
47 47

Syntax check Show Result Simulate

49

48

Send to chip

52

Tools
Terminal Emulator LCD designer LIB Manager
54 54 53

Graphic Converter
55

Options

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE Compiler Output Compiler I2C Compiler LCD

58 59 60 60 57 58

39

Compiler Communication

Compiler Misc. Environment Programmer Monitor Printer

65 66 62

Communication

Hardware Simulator
64

64

Window
Cascade Tile
67 67 66

Arrange Icons Minimize all

67

Help
About Index Forum Shop
67 67 68

68 68 68

Support Credits

4.3

File New Action

This option creates a new window in which you can write your program. The focus is set to the new window. Depending on the environment settings, the window is normal sized or maximized. Note that you must save your program before you can compile it. Newly created files will have the name [nonameX] in the window caption. Where X is a number starting with 1 for the first editor window. Before you can compile your program, you must give it a valid name.

4.4

File Open Action

With this option, you can load an existing program from disk. BASCOM saves files in ASCII format. Therefore, if you want to load a file, which is made with another editor, be sure that it is saved as an ASCII file. You can specify that BASCOM must reformat the file when it opens the file. See Options Environment 62 options.

2013 MCS Electronics

40

BASCOM-8051 This should only be necessary when loading files made with another editor. Since saved/closed files are put in a so called 'recent file list' , you can also open a file by selecting it from the File menu.

4.5

File Close Action

Close current editor window. When changes are made, and they are not saved yet, you will be asked to save your program.

4.6

File Save Action

With this option, you can quick save your current program to disk. If the program was created with the File New 39 option, you will be asked for a filename first. Use the File Save As 40 option to save the file with another name. Note that the file is saved as an ASCII file.

4.7

File Save As... Action

With this option, you can save your current program to disk. You can enter a filename before your program is saved. Note that the file is saved as an ASCII file.

4.8

File Print Preview Action

This will display the print preview window.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE

41

By clicking the Setup-button, you can change some printer properties. For margin settings, you must use the Options Printer settings 66 . For a hardcopy, click the Print-button.

See also
Print
41

4.9

File Print Action

With this option, you can print the current program. Note that the current program is the editor window, which has the focus.

See also
Print preview
40

4.10

File Exit Action

With this option, you can leave BASCOM. If you have made changes to your program, you can save them upon leaving BASCOM.

2013 MCS Electronics

42

BASCOM-8051

4.11

Edit Undo Action

With this option you can undo the last change you made to your program. By selecting this option again, you can undo the previous change to your program.

See also
Edit Redo
42

Shortcut
CTRL+Z

4.12

Edit Redo Action

With this option you can redo the last undo action.

See also
Edit Undo
42

Shortcut
SHIFT+CTRL+Z

4.13

Edit Copy Action

With this option, you can copy selected text into the clipboard. You can select text by dragging the mouse cursor over the text or by Double clicking on a word. Another possibility is to hold the shift key down and pressing the cursor keys. Selected text is shown inverted.

Shortcut
CTRL+C and CTRL+INS

4.14

Edit Cut Action

With this option, you can cut selected text into the clipboard. The selected text is copied into the clipboard, and deleted from your program.

Shortcut
CTRL+T

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE

43

4.15

Edit Paste Action

With this option, you can paste text from the clipboard into the current cursor position.

Shortcut
CTRL+ V and SHIFT + INS

4.16

Edit Find Action

With this option, you can search for text in your program. The following dialog window will appear:

You can choose to search forward or backward. Optional you can search case sensitive and for whole words. Regular expressions are also supported.

Shortcut
CTRL+F

4.17

Edit Find Next Action

With this option you can search for the next occurrence of the specified text. When you didn't specify a search text, you will be asked for the text to find, with the windows find-dialog.

See Also
2013 MCS Electronics

44

BASCOM-8051 Edit Find

43

Shortcut
F3

4.18

Edit Replace Action

With this option, you can replace text in your program. The following replace dialog will appear:

Enter the text to search for and the text to replace with, and press return.

Shortcut
CTRL+R

4.19

Edit Goto Action

With this option you can type the line number of the line you want to go to. The following screen will be shown :

The current line number will be shown. You can edit this and press RETURN to jump

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE to the line number of your choice.

45

4.20

Edit Indent Block Action

Indents a block of selected text. You need to select at least one line in order to use this option. When you have a structure like : Do a=a+1 b=b+1 Loop It is hard to see the structure. You can best indent your code. Do a=a+1 b=b+1 Loop When you have code that is not indented you can indent it by selecting the two line within the structure and choose 'Edit Indent Block'.

4.21

Edit Unindent Block Action

UnIndents a block of selected text. You need to select at least one line in order to use this option. When you have a structure like : Do a=a+1 b=b+1 Loop It is hard to see the structure. You can best indent your code. Do a=a+1 b=b+1 Loop When you have code that is not indented you can indent it by selecting the two line within the structure and choose 'Edit Indent Block'. The Unindent option can be used when the code is too much indented : Do a=a+1 b=b+1 Loop

2013 MCS Electronics

46

BASCOM-8051

The sample above show that too much indention does not make the program readable.

4.22

Editor Keys The following table lists all editor shortcuts.

Key LEFT ARROW RIGHT ARROW UP ARROW DOWN ARROW HOME END PAGE UP PAGE DOWN CTRL+LEFT CTRL+RIGHT CTRL+HOME CTRL+END CTRL+ Y INS F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F7 CTRL+F7 F8 SHIFT + F8 F9 F10 CTRL+J CTRL+G CTRL+O CTRL+S CTRL+P CTRL+T Action One character to the left One character to the right One line up One line down To the beginning of the line To the end of the line Up one window Down one window One word to the left One word to the right To the start of the text To the end of the text Delete current line Toggles insert/overstrike mode Help (context sensitive) File Simulation Find next text Send program to chip or run programmer Run program (simulator) Compile File Syntax check Step through program (simulator) Step over code (simulator) Toggle breakpoint (simulator) Run to cursor (simulator) Pop up code template Goto line Load File Save File Print File Terminal emulator

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE CTRL+F CTRL+W CTRL+L CTRL+X CTRL+C CTRL+V CTRL+Z CTRL+SHIFT+Z CTRL+SHIFT+I CTRL+SHIFT+U Find text Show result of compilation LCD designer Cut selected text into clipboard Copy selected text into clipboard Copy text from clipboard into editor Undo Redo Indent block Unindent block

47

To select text: Hold the SHIFT key down and use the cursor keys to select text. or keep the left mouse key pressed and tag the cursor over the text to select. To select a word, double click on it.

4.23

Program Compile Action

With this option you can compile your current program. Your program will be saved automatically before it will be compiled. So if you didn't give it a name, you will be asked for it. The following files will be created depending on the Option Compiler Settings. File xxx.BIN xxx.DBG xxx.HEX xxx.ERR xxx.RPT xxx.SIM xxx.PRJ Description Binary file which can be burned into EPROM. Debug file which is needed by the simulator. Intel hexadecimal file. Error file. (only when errors are found) Report file. Generated by the simulator to store the variable names of the watch window and the breakpoints.

If an error occurs, you will receive an error message and the compilation will end. The cursor will be set to the line in which the error occurred. The line will be marked with a red color too. The red marking color will disappear when you compile the program again.

Shortcut
F7

4.24

Program Syntax check Action

With this option you can check the syntax of your program. No files are generated with this option.

2013 MCS Electronics

48

BASCOM-8051

Shortcut
CTRL+F7

4.25

Program Show Result Action

Use this option to view the result of the compilation.

See the Options Compiler Output 57 for specifying which files must be created. The files that can be viewed are report and error. Click the Print button to print the selected file. Click the Ok button to return to the editor.

Shortcut
or CTRL+W Information provided in the report: Info Compiler Processor Report Date and time Comp.time Baud timer Baud rate and frequency Description Shows the version of the library (the compiler). The type of microprocessor the file is compiled for. The name of the source file. The compilation date and time. The start and end time needed for compilation. The timer used for the generation of the baud rate. The baud rate selected for the uP and the used crystal. This info is used for RS232 related statements such as PRINT and INPUT. Note that when you use the $crystal and $baud statements the exact baud rate is shown.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE ROM start RAM start LCD mode Stack start The starting location of ROM memory. The starting location of RAM memory. 4 bit or 8 bit LCD mode.

49

The starting location of the stack. The space below the stack is used for internal variables. The stack grows when calls are made by the machine language routines. Displays the length of the binary file. The name, type and the location in memory of the used variables

Used ROM Variable

4.26

Program Simulate
This option displays the Simulator window in which you can simulate a compiled program. When the source code is saved without compiling, you will be warned that the debug file differs from the source code. You have the option to compile it before you simulate or continue without recompiling.

The simulator window is divided in a few sections. Toolbar with speed buttons Variable watch/modify window Source code window Terminal (input/output) window Register window Status bar

The margin
On the left side a margin is visible. This margin can display the following icons: a yellow dot, indicating that the line holds executable code

2013 MCS Electronics

50

BASCOM-8051 a read dot, indicating that a break line is set. You can only set a breakpoint on a line that has a yellow dot. a yellow arrow. This arrow shows the line currently executing.

The register window

On the right side the register window is visible. You can change the value of a register by entering a new value.

The variable watch section

The section below the toolbar is the variable watch section. You can add a variable by entering one in an empty cell. You can also add a new variable by selecting it from the source window, and pressing return. You can insert a new variable watch line by pressing the INS-key. You can delete a variable watch line by pressing the CTRL+DEL keys. You can change the value of a variable by setting the focus to the cell with the variables value and then by entering the new value. The variable names are saved and loaded after each simulation session.

The terminal section

The blue window emulates the serial port. So serial output (the PRINT statement for example), is displayed in this window. When serial input is required, you must set the focus to the serial window, before you enter text. The INPUT statement for example, requires serial input.

The source code window

The source code windows shows the source file being simulated. You can start a simulation by pressing F5 or by clicking the run button . When your program runs, you can pause it by clicking the pause button . You can stop the simulation by clicking the stop button. You can also step through the code line by line, by pressing F8, or by clicking the step button . By pressing SHIFT+F8 , you can step over code, like GOSUB and CALL. To pause execution at a certain line, you can set a breakpoint. Just set the cursor on that line and press F9. By pressing F9 again, you can remove the breakpoint. Note that a breakpoint can only be set on a line that contains executable code. This is visible by the yellow dot. Statements like $romstart don't contain executable code and won't have a corresponding yellow dot. You can also run to a specified line by clicking the run to button .

The status bar

The status bar is also divided into a few sections. These sections from left to right display the following information: The value of a variable in the source code window. You can select a variable by moving the mouse cursor over the variable name. The status of the simulator (stopped, running or paused) The number of clock cycles and the execution time of the executed code. You can reset the value by clicking on this section. The stack depth of the program. The stack depth is the deepest level the stack has reached during execution. If it exceeds the available internal memory (128 or 256 bytes), the program will not run correctly in the chip.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE

51

The interrupt buttons

The INT0, INT1, T0, T1 and SER buttons can be clicked to generate an interrupt. Because this is a software emulator, no hardware interrupts can be generated. You have to do this yourself by clicking these buttons. TIMER 0 and TIMER 1 are simulated by software. Therefore, they will generate an interrupt automatically if the software enables this. The external gate however isn't simulated so for this occasion you must click the corresponding button. Depending on the chip used, other interrupt buttons can be visible. They have the same purpose as the default interrupt buttons.

Hardware simulator button

By clicking the hardware simulator button a special window will become visible. This window has a LCD simulator, which can simulate custom characters, LED simulation for port 0-3, and a 7-digit LED display simulation. The LCD type can be selected from the menu. Note that the display isn't as fast as it could be, but to assign/display all the dots costs a lot of processor time. The advantage however is that custom characters can be displayed too. The LED's can be switched on or off by clicking on it. The LED type can be set with the CG checkboxes. To select common ground you must set the marker. This will have the effect that all common cathodes are connected to ground and so the LED will be on when the port value will be high. The 7-digit display can be connected to individual port pins. To change the setting you must press the right mouse button to bring up the digit properties window.

Each segment is named with a letter. To change a port pin, select the segment from the list and press the spacebar. Now you can enter the desired port pin. After you are done with assigning/changing, press the Ok button.

Real hardware simulation

Press the real hardware simulation button to enable the hardware simulation. You need additional hardware to use this feature. You can use the MCS flash programmer to simulate one port. An application note can be downloaded that describes the needed hardware. The hardware simulator can simulate port 1 and 3. This way you can test your program in circuit without programming the device. Now only the status reading and setting of the ports is supported. This means that interrupts are not yet supported in hardware simulation.

Update source
The displaying of the variables and the arrow costs a lot of processor time. To simulate faster, you can disable the update of these items. Click the enable/disable the update. button to

2013 MCS Electronics

52

BASCOM-8051

Display memory window

To display the memory of the internal RAM, you can click the again, you can hide the window. button. By clicking

Refresh variables
Normally, variables are only refreshed in step mode (F8), because depending on the used statements, the value would be hard to watch. You can also choose to display the value during program execution. The default is on. The sections can be made larger or smaller by using the splitters. When you press the right mouse button, a popup menu will be visible. Depending on the place the mouse cursor was at the time you pressed the rightmouse button, different options will be showed. Extra options that will be come available are: Clear breakpoints Hide register window Hide watch window To end a session close the windows or just set the focus to an editor window.

4.27

Program Send to chip

After you have tested your program you can run one of the supported programmers. You can also press F4 or click on the button.

Some programmers support the auto flash option from the programmers options. When you select this option, the programmer window will not be visible, but the chip will be erased, programmed and verified automatically. The progress will be visible in the IDE-menu bar. Different serial comport and parallel printer port based programmers are supported. You must select one first with the Options Programmers 64 menu. MCS Flashprogrammer 264 Blow IT Flashprogrammer 267 PG2051 267 MCS SPI programmer 266 PG302 268 JPK Systems X-programmer 272 Peter Averill's TAFE programmer 273 SE512 or SE514 269 SE-812 270 STK200/STK300 ISP programmer 274 Sample Electronics simple cable ISP programmer RHOMBUS SCE-51 Emulator 275 CYGNAL JTAG programmer 272

270

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE

53

4.28

Tools Terminal Emulator

With this option you can start the built in terminal emulator. The following window will appear:

The terminal emulator supports ANSI, TTY, VT100 and VT220 terminal emulation. Information you type and information that the computer board sends, are displayed in the same window. You must use the same baud rate for the terminal emulator and the program you compile. If you compiled your program with the Compiler Settings at 4800 baud, you must set the Communication Settings also to 4800 baud. The setting for the baud rate is reported in the report file. The terminal menu has a few options.

File upload
This will upload the current program in HEX format to a monitor program. With the Options Monitor settings, you can specify an optional header to be sent before the actual hex file is sent to the monitor. Also a delay in mS can be specified for a optional delays after each line sent. When an ALTAIR ROM is selected from the Monitor Options, a binary file will be sent to the monitor. The baud rate of the terminal emulator will be used. For an 552 ALTAIR ROM, the terminal baud rate must be set to 115200 baud.

While sending the hex file to the monitor, an extra menu option will be available:

File Escape
This will abort the upload to the monitor program.

File Exit
This will close the terminal emulator window.

2013 MCS Electronics

54

BASCOM-8051

4.29

Tools LCD designer

With this option, you can design special characters for LCD displays. The following window will appear:

The LCD matrix has 7x5 points. The bottom row is reserved for the cursor but can be used. You can select a point by clicking the left mouse button. If a cell was selected it will be de selected. By clicking, the Clear All button you can clear all points. By clicking the Set All button you can set all points. With the Options Compiler LCD 59 settings you can choose if the 3 most significant bits must be set high. Some LCD displays require this. When you are finished you can press the Ok button: a statement will be inserted in your active program editor window at the current cursor position. The statement looks like this : Deflcdchar
140

?,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8

You must replace the ?-sign with a number ranging from 0 to7. When you want to display the custom character you can use the chr() function. LCD chr(0) 'will display custom character 0. The numbers after the custom character are representing the row values. An empty row is converted to 32 (space) since a zero is used to terminate the bytes.

4.30

Tools Graphic Converter

The Graphic converter is intended to convert BMP files into BASCOM Graphic Files (BGF) that can be used with Graphic LCD displays. The following dialog box will be shown :

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE

55

To load a picture click the Load button. The picture may be 64 pixels high and 240 pixels width. When the picture is larger it will be adjusted. You can use your favorite graphic tool to create the bitmaps and use the Graphic converter to convert them into black and white images. When you click the Save-button the picture will be converted into black and white. Any non-white color will be converted into black. The resulting file will have the BGF extension. Press the Ok-button to return to the editor. The picture can be shown with the ShowPic
220

statement.

4.31

Tools LIB Manager

With this option you can add and remove ASM routines to the libraries. The following windows will be displayed:

2013 MCS Electronics

56

BASCOM-8051

Select a library first by clicking on it. The Routines list will be refreshed with the contents of the selected library. By clicking the Add button a dialog box will be shown to select the ASM file that contains the ASM routine(s). By clicking on the Delete button the selected Routine will be removed from the selected library. A library is an ASCII file that contains ASM routines. Each routine must be preceded by the name of the routine between brackets. Each routine must be ended with the [END] line. A sample routine is shown here : [_DEC76] ;decrease the register pair r6 and r7 with one ; return zero in ACC when r6r7 is zero _Dec76: Dec r6 ; dec LSB Cjne r6,#255,*+4 ; if it was zero Dec r7 ; we need to decrease r7 to Mov a,r7 ; result into a Orl a,r6 ; OR with r6 to see if it is zero Ret [END] The library can be included with the $LIB 95 directive. A routine can be imported with the $EXTERNAL 93 directive. $lib "mylib.lib" $external _dec76

4.32

Tools Triscent Converter

The Triscent Converter will convert a .H file generated by the Triscend program into a triscend.DAT file that can be used by BASCOM. The triscend.DAT file has an additional section named XBYTE. [XBYTE] CMAP0_TAR = ff00 CMAP0_ALT = ff01 The 3 lines above show the section and 2 entries. The triscend chips are configured by writing to locations where normally XRAM is located. BASCOM handles this automatic for you. So when you assign a value to CMAP0_TAR, the value is written to location &HFF00 where the CMAP0_TAR register is located. Reading this XRAM SFR will do the reverse.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE

57

At www.triscend.com you can find all info you need. Look for the E5 line of chips. These are 8051 compatible chips which can be configured with the Triscend software. You can for example create 3 UARTS, add I2C, SPI, TIMERS etc. So the E5 chip is hardware configurable by software! After you created your chip , you create the .H file and this file must be imported with the Tools Triscend Convert option. There is an evaluation KIT available from triscend. Another pro is that the chips have many pins. So when your design needs a lot of I/O pins, I advise to look at these chips.

4.33

Tools Export to RTF Action

Exports the current file to an RTF file.

Remarks
RTF files can be used in documents such as Word files. RTF files can also be used to show code with colors on a web page. When your file has the name test.bas , a file with the name test.rtf will be created in the same directory.

4.34

Options Compiler Output

With this option you can specify which files must be created.

Binary file

This will generate a ROM-image of the program. Of course you can

2013 MCS Electronics

58

BASCOM-8051 also store it in a flashrom. Debug file Hex file This option will generate a DBG-file. It is used by the simulator. When you don't use the simulator, you don't need to generate it. This is an Intel hex-file that is used by most programmers and monitor programs.

Old Intel hex This option will generate an old style Intel hex file and is used by the file Elektor monitor. If you choose this option, you must unselect the Hex File option. Report file Error file This file contains info about the program, such as the baudrate, used variables etc. This file is generated when an error occurs. It holds the error descriptions. When there is no error, the file will not be created.

4.35

Options Compiler Communication

With this options you can select the used crystal and the baud rate that must be used with serial communications.

We advise to use the $BAUD 89 and $CRYSTAL 92 compiler directives in your program. This way the settings are stored in your source code.

4.36

Options Compiler I2C

With this option you can select the port pins that serve as the SDA and SCL line for the I2C statements.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE

59

You can also use the CONFIG SDA

128

and CONFIG SCL

128

statements.

4.37

Options Compiler LCD

With this option you can select the port pins for the LCD display. This only applies to the LCD statements when used in 4-bit mode and if the LCD display is connected to the port pins. You can also choose the port pins with the CONFIG LCDPIN 125 statement.

In the 4-bit mode, only the highest nibble of the data lines is used. To spare a pin for the R/W pin, reading from the LCD is not supported and you must connect the R/W line to ground. See additional hardware 257 for more info. You can also use the LCD statements in the data bus mode.

2013 MCS Electronics

60

BASCOM-8051

Some LCD displays needs the upper 3 bits to be set high. So when you have this kind of display you must select this option. When you select this option the LCD designer will set the upper 3 bits high when the DEFLCDCHAR 140 statement is generated.

4.38

Options Compiler Misc

With the miscellaneous options you can change the following

Remarks
register file Select the register file which is suitable for your target uP. The reg51.DAT file is the common file that works for every uP, but doesnt have hardware specific registers. You can use this file as a base for your own DAT file. Specifies the last location of internal memory that can be used by the compiler for storing variables. For uP's with 128 bytes of RAM set it to 70 for example. All space after this value is used for the stack. With the simulator you can test if you run out of stack space. For uP's with 256 bytes of internal RAM, you can use a higher value, F0 for example. Select this option to enable the compiler to give a warning message when the code size exceeds the specified size.(decimal)

byte end

size warning

4.39

Options Communication
With this option you can modify the communication settings for the BASCOM terminal emulator. The following window will appear:

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE

61

Option Comport Baud rate Parity Data bits Stop bits Handshake Emulation Font Backcolor

Remark The comport of you computer to use. The baud rate to use. The parity to use. The number of data bits to use. The number of stop bits to use. The handshake to use. The terminal emulation to use. Click the button to select the font and font color to use. The background color to use (default blue)

Run emulator modal Runs the terminal emulator in modal mode so you can use all key combinations that are normally reserved to the IDE. Note that the baud rate of the terminal emulator and the baud rate setting of the compiler options, must be the same in order to work correctly.

2013 MCS Electronics

62

BASCOM-8051

4.40

Options Environment
With this option you can modify the environment options.

OPTION Auto indent Don't change case

DESCRIPTION With auto indent, the cursor will be set to the same left margin as the current line when you press return. This option will not change the case of your line when you enabled 'Reformat code'. By default each first characters case is set to uppercase. Reformat files when loading them into the editor. This is only necessary when you are loading files that were created with another editor. Normally you don't need to set this option. Reformat code when entered in the editor. This will reformat the line after you have set focus to a new line. Will look at the previous line for non spaces to position the cursor. Enables/disables syntax highlighting Shows a margin at position 80. The right position of the comment. The number of spaces equivalent to one tab. Selects the behavior of the editor. Default behaves like Delphi. Specifies file extensions separated by a space where the reformatting is disabled. (for text files or dat files) Selects the size of the edit window when a file is opened.

Reformat BAS files

Reformat code Smart tabs Syntax highlight Show margin Comment position Tab size Key mapping No reformat extension Size of new edit window

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE

63

OPTION Background color Keyword color Comment color ASM color HW register color Editor font Bold Italic

DESCRIPTION Background color of the editor Color used to highlight keywords(statements) Color used to highlight comment Color used to highlight assembly Color used to highlight special function registers Font name of the editor Check to display keywords in bold Check to display comment in Italic

2013 MCS Electronics

64

BASCOM-8051

OPTION Tool tips Show Toolbar Save File As for new files File location

DESCRIPTION Will enable/disable tool tips. Will display/hide the toolbar of the IDE. When you enable this option you will be prompted to give new files a name before they will be saved with their default name. The path to the location of your BAS files. Normally Windows will use My documents as a default.

4.41

Options hardware simulator

This option let you select the address of the LPT connected to the optional hardware simulator.

4.42

Options Programmer
This option let you select the target programmer. The supported programmers are : MCS Flashprogrammer 264 Blow IT programmer 267 PG2051 267 MCS SPI programmer 266 PG302 268 JPK Systems X-programmer 272 Peter Averill's TAFE programmer SE512 or SE514 269 SE-812 270 CYGNAL 272 FutureLec 272 SE511-SE516 276

273

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE

65

The auto flash options will automatic program a chip without displaying the programmer window. The auto verify option will verify automatically after each programming. Selecting 'Code + Data' will program both the flash and the EEPROM.

You can select various programmers. On the Parallel-TAB you can select the LPTaddress. You can also Add or Remove an LPT-address. It is only possible to remove address that you added yourself. The port delay can best be set to 0. In some cases you might want to increase the value. Some programmers have I2C chips on them. For example the MCS Flash programmer. Since different I2C chips exist for the PCF8574, you need to select the checkbox when you use the PCF8574A.

4.43

Options Monitor
With the monitor options you can select the monitor you use. There are only a few monitor programs supported. Altair 535/537 Altair 552 Monitor hex upload The Altair monitor needs special instructions and uses binary files. The hex upload feature is meant for monitor programs that work with hex files. You can upload a file to the target uP from the terminal emulator with the Upload file option. For hex file based monitors there are 3 additional options:

2013 MCS Electronics

66

BASCOM-8051 o monitor prefix, is sent before the hex file o monitor suffix, is sent after the hex file upload is completed The prefix and suffix can contain returns or any ASCII character. Use {asc} , to imbed an ASCII character. asc=0-255. For example @{13} for the prefix, will send @ followed by a return. o monitor delay, must be specified in msec's, and is the delay time for each line sent.

4.44

Options Printer
These options let you select the printer margins.

Left Margin Top Margin Right Margin Bottom Margin Color Wrap Lines

Print Header Line Numbers Syntax

The left printer margin in mm The top printer margin in mm The right printer margin in mm The bottom printer margin in mm Check to print in color. Check when you want long lines to be wrapped. This is convenient when you have long lines of source code that would otherwise would not fit on the paper. Check to print a header with file name and page number Check to print line numbers Check to use syntax highlighting options and colors

4.45

Window cascade
Will cascade all editor windows so they will all be visible.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM IDE

67

4.46

Window Tile
Window Tile will tile all editor windows.

4.47

Window arrange icons

Will arrange all iconized windows.

4.48

Window minimize all

Will minimize all editor windows.

4.49

Help About
This option shows an about box as displayed below.

Your serial number is shown in the about box. You will need this when you have questions about the product. The library version is also shown. You can compare it with the one from our web site in case you need an update. Click on the Ok-button to return to the editor.

4.50

Help Index
Will show the help index of BASCOM.

4.51

Help on help
Will bring up help about the Windows help system.

2013 MCS Electronics

68

BASCOM-8051

4.52

Help Shop Action

This option will launch your default web browser and will open the MCS Electronics Shop. We have a number of BASCOM-8051 KIT's and affordable 89Cx051 programmers from Sample Electronics

4.53

Help Forum Action

This option will launch your default web browser and will open the MCS Forum. The forum can be used to talk to other BASCOM users. You can get idea's there, discuss your problems and questions, and you can help other members.

4.54

Help Support Action

This option will launch your default web browser and will open the MCS Support system. The support system can be used to search the knowledge base.

4.55

Help Credits
Will launch this help file and show this topic. MCS would like to thank the following people who have contributed to BASCOM development : Peter Averill from the Victoria University TAFE. Peter designed both the TAFE AT89C2051 programmer and the software to support it. Antti from Silicon Studio Ltd. Antti designed the BlowIT ATA89C2051 programmer and software to support it. Jakub Jiricek, he designed the SPI-programmer and software to support it. Francois du Plessis, he wrote a Windows version of Jacub's SPI-programmer software. Henry Arndt (DL2TM) , he provided me with the source for his popular Atmel Programmer.

2013 MCS Electronics

Part

70

BASCOM-8051

5
5.1

Language fundamentals
Language fundamentals
Characters from the BASCOM character set are put together to form labels, keywords, variables and operators. These in turn combine to form statements that make up a program. This chapter describes the character set and the format of BASCOM program lines. In particular, it discusses: The specific characters in the character set and the special meanings of some characters. The format of a line in a BASCOM program. Line labels. Program line length.

Character Set
The BASCOM BASIC character set consists of alphabetic characters, numeric characters, and special characters. The alphabetic characters in BASCOM are the uppercase letters (A-Z) and lowercase letters (az) of the alphabet. The BASCOM numeric characters are the digits 0-9. The letters can be used as parts of hexadecimal numbers. The following characters have special meanings in BASCOM statements and expressions: Character ENTER Description Terminates input of a line Blank ( or space) ' * + , . / : " ; < = > \ Single quotation mark (apostrophe) Asterisks (multiplication symbol) Plus sign Comma Minus sign Period (decimal point) Slash (division symbol) will be handled as \ Colon Double quotation mark Semicolon Less than Equal sign (assignment symbol or relational operator) Greater than Backslash (integer/word division symbol)

The BASCOM program line

BASCOM program lines have the following syntax: [[line-identifier]] [[statement]] [[:statement]] ... [[comment]]

2013 MCS Electronics

Language fundamentals

71

Using Line Identifiers

BASCOM support one type of line-identifier; alphanumeric line labels: An alphanumeric line label may be any combination of from 1 to 32 letters and digits, starting with a letter and ending with a colon. BASCOM keywords are not permitted. The following are valid alphanumeric line labels: Alpha: ScreenSUB: Test3A: Case is not significant. The following line labels are equivalent: alpha: Alpha: ALPHA: Line labels may begin in any column, as long as they are the first characters other than blanks on the line. Blanks are not allowed between an alphabetic label and the colon following it. A line can have only one label.

BASCOM Statements
A BASCOM statement is either " executable" or " nonexecutable" . An executable statement advances the flow of a programs logic by telling the program what tot do next. Non executable statement perform tasks such as allocating storage for variables, declaring and defining variable types. The following BASCOM statements are examples of non executable statements: REM or (starts a comment) DIM A " comment" is a nonexecutable statement used to clarify a programs operation and purpose. A comment is introduced by the REM statement or a single quote character('). The following lines are equivalent: PRINT " Quantity remaining" : REM Print report label. PRINT " Quantity remaining" ' Print report label. More than one BASCOM statement can be placed on a line, but colons(:) must separate statements, as illustrated below. FOR I = 1 TO 5 : PRINT " Gday, mate." : NEXT I

BASCOM LineLength
If you enter your programs using the built-in editor, you are not limited to any line length, although it is advised to shorten your lines to 80 characters for clarity.

Data Types
Every variable in BASCOM has a data type that determines what can be stored in the variable. The next section summarizes the elementary data types.

Elementary Data Types

Bit (1/8 byte) Byte (1 byte) Bytes are stores as unsigned 8-bit binary numbers ranging in value from 0 to 255. Integer (two bytes).

2013 MCS Electronics

72

BASCOM-8051 Integers are stored as signed sixteen-bit binary numbers ranging in value from -32,768 to +32,767. Word (two bytes). Words are stored as unsigned sixteen-bit binary numbers ranging in value from 0 to 65535. Long (four bytes). Longs are stored as signed 32-bit binary numbers ranging in value from 2147483648 to 2147483647. Single Singles are stored as signed 32 bit binary numbers. String (up to 254 bytes). Strings are stored as bytes and are terminated with a 0-byte. A string dimensioned with a length of 10 bytes will occupy 11 bytes.

Variables can be stored internal (default) or external.

Variables
A variable is a name that refers to an object--a particular number. A numeric variable can be assigned only a numeric value (either integer, word, byte long, single or bit). The following list shows some examples of variable assignments: A constant value: A=5 C = 1.1 The value of another numeric variable: abc = def k=g The value obtained by combining other variables, constants, and operators: Temp = a + 5 Temp = C + 5

Variable Names
A BASCOM variable name may contain up to 32 characters. The characters allowed in a variable name are letters and numbers. The first character in a variable name must be a letter. A variable name cannot be a reserved word, but embedded reserved words are allowed. For example, the following statement is illegal because AND is a reserved word. AND = 8 However, the following statement is legal: ToAND = 8 Reserved words include all BASCOM commands, statements, function names, internal registers and operator names. (see BASCOM Reserved Words 283 , for a complete list of reserved words). You can specify a hexadecimal or binary number with the prefix &H or &B. a = &HA , a = &B1010 and a = 10 are all the same. Before assigning a variable you must tell the compiler about it with the DIM statement. Dim b1 As Bit, I as Integer, k as Byte , s As String * 10 You can also use DEFINT 140 , DEFBIT 140 , DEFBYTE 140 and/or DEFWORD 140 . For example DEFINT c tells the compiler that all variables that are not dimensioned and that are beginning with the character c are of the Integer type.

Expressions and Operators

2013 MCS Electronics

Language fundamentals

73

This chapter discusses how to combine, modify, compare, or get information about expressions by using the operators available in BASCOM. Anytime you do a calculation you are using expressions and operators. This chapter describes how expressions are formed and concludes by describing the following kind of operators: Arithmetic operators, used to perform calculations. Relational operators, used to compare numeric values. Logical operators, used to test conditions or manipulate individual bits. Functional operators, used to supplement simple operators.

Expressions and Operators

An expression can be a numeric constant, a variable, or a single value obtained by combining constants, variables, and other expressions with operators. Operators perform mathematical or logical operations on values. The operators provides by BASCOM can be divided into four categories, as follows: 1. Arithmetic 2. Relational 3. Logical 4. Functional

Arithmetic
Arithmetic operators are +, - , * and \. Integer Integer division is denoted by the backslash (\). Example: Z=X\Y Modulo Arithmetic Modulo arithmetic is denoted by the modulus operator MOD. Modulo arithmetic provides the remainder, rather than the quotient, of an integer division. Example: X = 10 \ 4 : remainder = 10 MOD 4 Overflow and division by zero Division by zero, produces an error. At this moment there is no message, so you have to insure yourself that such wont happen.

Relational Operators
Relational operators are used to compare two values as shown in the table below. The result can be used to make a decision regarding program flow. Operator = <> < > <= >= Relation Tested Equality Inequality Less than Greater than Less than or equal to Greater than or equal to Expression X=Y X <> Y X<Y X>Y X <= Y X >= Y

2013 MCS Electronics

74

BASCOM-8051

Logical Operators
Logical operators perform tests on relations, bit manipulations, or Boolean operators. There are four operators in BASCOM, they are : Operator NOT AND OR XOR Meaning Logical complement Conjunction Disjunction Exclusive or

It is possible to use logical operators to test bytes for a particular bit pattern. For example the AND operator can be used to mask all but one of the bits of a status byte, while OR can be used to merge two bytes to create a particular binary value. Example A = 63 And 19 PRINT A A = 10 Or 9 PRINT A Output 16 11

Floating point
Single numbers conform to the IEEE binary floating point standard. An eight-bit exponent and 24 bit mantissa are supported. Using four bytes, the format is shown below: 31 30________23 22______________________________0 s exponent mantissa The exponent is biased by 128. Above 128 are positive exponents and below are negative. The sign bit is 0 for positive numbers and 1 for negative. The mantissa is stored in hidden bit normalized format so that 24 bits of precision can be obtained. All mathematical operations are supported by the single. You can also convert a single to an integer or word or vise versa: Dim I as Integer, S as Single S = 100.1 'assign the single I=S 'will convert the single to an integer Take a look at the single.bas example for more information.

Arrays
An array is a set of sequentially indexed elements having the same type. Each element of an array has a unique index number that identifies it. Changes made to an element of an array do not affect the other elements. The index must be a numeric constant, a byte, an integer or a word. This means that an array can hold 65535 elements as a maximum. The minimum value is 1 and not zero as in QB.

2013 MCS Electronics

Language fundamentals

75

Arrays can be used on each place where a 'normal' variable is expected but there are a few exceptions. These exceptions are shown in the help topics. Note that there are no BIT arrays in BASCOM-8051. Example: Dim a(10) as byte 'make an array named a, with 10 elements (1 to 10) Dim c as Integer For C = 1 To 10 a(c) = c 'assign array element Print a(c) 'print it Next

Strings
Strings can be up to 254 characters long in BASCOM. To save memory you must specify how long each string must be with the DIM statement. Dim S As String * 10 This will reserve space for the string S with a length of 10 bytes. The actual length is 11 bytes because a nul(0) is used to terminate the string. You can concatenate string with the + sign. Dim S As String * 10 , Z As String * 10 S = "test" Z = S + "abc" + var In QB you can assign a string with a value and add the original string (or a part of it) too : S = "test" S = "a" + s This will result in the string "atest" In BASCOM-8051 this is NOT possible because this would require a copy of the string. In BASCOM the string S is assigned with "a" and on that moment the original string S is destroyed. So you must make a copy of the string yourself in the event you need this functionality.

2013 MCS Electronics

Part

VI

BASCOM Language Reference

77

6
6.1

BASCOM Language Reference

BASCOM Statements
-11WRESET, 1WREAD, 1WWRITE 83 1WSEARCHFIRST 85 , 1WSEARCHNEXT

87

, 1WIRECOUNT

84

-COMPILER DIRECTIVES#IF 80 #ELSE 81 #ENDIF 82 $ASM - $END ASM 88 $INCLUDE 93 $BAUD 89 $BGF 90 $CRYSTAL 92 $DEFAULT XRAM 92 $IRAMSTART 94 $LARGE 94 $LCD 95 $MAP 97 $NOBREAK 97 $NOINIT 98 $NONAN 98 $NONULL 99 $NORAMCLEAR 99 $NOSP 100 $OBJ 100 $RAMSIZE 101 $RAMSTART 103 $REGFILE 104 $ROMSTART 104 $SERIALINPUT 105 $SERIALINPUT2LCD 105 $SERIALOUTPUT 106 $SIM 107

-AABS 109 ALIAS 108 ASC 110 AVG 110 -BBITWAIT 112 BCD 112 BREAK 113 -CCALL 113 CLOSE 198

2013 MCS Electronics

78

BASCOM-8051 CLS 115 CHR 114 CONFIG 116 CONST 116 COUNTER 132 CPEEK 134 CURSOR 135 -DDATA 136 DEBOUNCE 137 DECR 138 DECLARE 139 DEFINT 140 DEFBIT 140 DEFBYTE 140 DEFLCDCHAR 140 DEFWORD 140 DELAY 141 DIM 141 DISABLE 143 DISPLAY 143 DO 144 -EELSE 144 ENABLE 145 END 146 END IF 146 ERASE 147 EXIT 148 -FFOR 148 FOURTHLINE FUSING 150
149

-GGET 151 GETAD 152 GETAD2051 GETRC 158 GETRC5 160 GOSUB 162 GOTO 163

153

-HHEX 163 HEXVAL 164 HIGH 164 HIGHW 165 HOME 166 -II2CRECEIVE 166 I2CSEND 167 I2CSTART 168 I2CSTOP 168 I2CRBYTE 168

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference I2CWBYTE 168 IDLE 169 IF 169 INCR 171 INKEY 171 INP 173 INPUT 173 INPUTBIN 175 INPUTHEX 176 INSTR 177 -LLCASE 178 LCD 178 LCDINIT 181 LCDHEX 182 LEFT 183 LEN 183 LOAD 184 LOCATE 185 LOOKUP 185 LOOKUPSTR 186 LOOP 144 LOW 187 LOWW 188 LOWERLINE 188 -MMAKEDEC 189 MAKEBCD 189 MAKEINT 190 MAX 190 MID 191 MIN 192 MOD 192 -NNEXT
196

79

-OON Interrupt ON Value 197 OPEN 198 OUT 200

196

-PP1,P3 201 PEEK 202 POKE 202 PSET 207 POWERDOWN PRINT 203 PRINTBIN 204 PRINTHEX 205 PRIORITY 206 PUT 207

203

-RREAD 208 READMAGCARD REM 211 REPLACE 211

209

2013 MCS Electronics

80

BASCOM-8051 RESET 212 RESTORE 212 RETURN 213 RIGHT 214 RND 214 ROTATE 215 -SSELECT 216 SET 216 SHIFT 217 SHIFTCURSOR 217 SHIFTIN 218 SHIFTOUT 218 SHIFTLCD 219 SHOWPIC 220 SOUND 220 SPACE 222 SPC 223 SPIIN 224 SPIOUT 225 START 225 STOP 226 STOP TIMER 226 STR 228 STRING 228 SUB 229 SWAP 230 -TTHEN 169 THIRDLINE 230 TIMEOUT 107 TO 148 -UUCASE 231 UPPERLINE
232

-VVAL 232 VARPTR

233

-WWAIT 233 WAITKEY 234 WAITMS 234 WHILE .. WEND

236

6.2

#IF Action
Conditional compilation directive that tests for a condition.

Syntax
#IF test [#ELSE]

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference #ENDIF

81

Remarks
test An expression to test for. The expression may contain defined constants.

Conditional compilation is used to include parts of your program. This is a convenient way to build different files depending on some constant values. Note that unlike the IF statement, the #IF directive does not expect a THEN. You may nest conditions to 25 levels. The use of #ELSE is optional.

See Also
#ELSE
81

, #ENDIF

82

Example
Const DEMO = 1 ' 0 = normal , 1= demo #If Demo Print "Demo program" #Else Print "Full version" #Endif Since the constant DEMO is assigned with the value 1, the compiler will compile only the line : Print "Demo program". Code between #else and #endif is not compiled! When you change the constant DEMO to 0, the other line will be compiled.

6.3

#ELSE Action
Conditional compilation directive that tests for a NOT condition.

Syntax
#IF test #ELSE #ENDIF

Remarks
test An expression to test for. The expression may contain defined constants.

Conditional compilation is used to include parts of your program. This is a convenient way to build different files depending on some constant values. Note that unlike the IF statement, the #IF directive does not expect a THEN. You may nest conditions to 25 levels. The use of #ELSE is optional. The code between #ELSE and #ENDIF will be compiled when the expression is not true.

2013 MCS Electronics

82

BASCOM-8051

See Also
#IF
80

, #ENDIF

82

Example
CONST DEMO = 1 ' 0 = normal , 1= demo #IF Demo Print "Demo program" #ELSE Print "Full version" #ENDIF Since the constant DEMO is assigned with the value 1, the compiler will compile only the line : Print "Demo program" . Code between #else and #endif is not compiled! When you change the constant DEMO to 0, the other line will be compiled.

6.4

#ENDIF Action
Conditional compilation directive that ends a test.

Syntax
#IF test [#ELSE] #ENDIF

Remarks
Test An expression to test for. The expression may contain defined constants.

Conditional compilation is used to include parts of your program. This is a convenient way to build different files depending on some constant values. Note that unlike the IF statement, the #IF directive does not expect a THEN. You may nest conditions to 25 levels. The use of #ELSE is optional. Note that #ENDIF must be written as #ENDIF, not as #END IF

See Also
#IF
80

, #ELSE

82

Example
CONST DEMO = 1 ' 0 = normal , 1= demo #IF Demo Print "Demo program" #ELSE Print "Full version" #ENDIF Since the constant DEMO is assigned with the value 1, the compiler will compile only the line : Print "Demo program" . Code between #else and #endif is not compiled! When you change the constant DEMO to 0, the other line will be compiled.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

83

6.5

1WIRE Action
These routines can be used to communicate with Dallas Semiconductors 1Wiredevices.

Syntax 1 for use with the CONFIG 1WIRE statement

1WRESET 1WWRITE var1 [ , bytes] var2 = 1WREAD( [ bytes])

Syntax 2 for use with multiple devices/pins

1WRESET pin 1WWRITE var1 [ , bytes] pin var2 = 1WREAD( [ bytes] [, pin]) var2 = 1WREAD( [pin]) Pin is the port pin to use with the device such as P1.1

Remarks
1WRESET 1WWRITE var1 Reset the 1WIRE bus. The error variable ERR will return 1 if an error occurred. Sends the value of var1 to the bus. Optional is the number of bytes that mist be sent. var1 is a numeric variable or constant. var2 = 1WREAD Reads a byte from the bus and places it into var2. () Optional is the number of bytes that must be read. var2 is a number variable.

Example
'-------------------------------------------------------------' 1WIRE.BAS ' demonstrates 1wreset, 1wwrite and 1wread() ' pull-up of 4K7 required to VCC from P.1 ' DS2401 serial button connected to P1.1 '-------------------------------------------------------------Config 1wire = P1.1 'use this pin Dim Ar(8) As Byte , A As Byte , I As Byte 1wreset Print Err 1wwrite &H33 For I = 1 To 8 Ar(i) = 1wread() Next For I = 1 To 8 Printhex Ar(i); Next Print 'linefeed 'You can also use multiple pins 'reset the device 'print error 1 if error 'read ROM command 'place into array

'print output

2013 MCS Electronics

84

BASCOM-8051 'alias the pin first Tsensor Alias P1.2 'the optional argument specifies the pin to use 1wreset Tsensor 1wwrite &H33 Tsensor value to Tsensor 1wwrite Ar(1) , 2 Tsensor bytes to Tsensor A = 1wread(tsensor) byte from Tsensor Ar(1) = 1wread(2 , P1.2) bytes from Tsensor End 'reset 'write 'write 2 'return 'read 2

6.6

1WIRECOUNT Action
This statement returns the number of 1wire devices found on the bus.

Syntax
var2 = 1WIRECOUNT(array )

Remarks
var2 Array A word variable that is assigned with the number if found 1wire devices on the bus. A variable or array that should be at least 8 bytes long. It is used to store the 1wire IDs while counting.

The 1wireCount function uses the 1wSearchFirst() and 1wSearchNexy functions internally.

See also
1WIRE
83

, 1WSEARCHFIRST

85

, 1WSEARCHNEXT

87

Example
'-------------------------------------------------------------------------' 1wirecount.bas ' (c)1995-2006 MCS Electronics ' demonstration of using multiple devices '------------------------------------------------------------------------'chip we use $regfile = "89s8252.dat" 'crystal attached $crystal = 12000000 'baud rate $baud = 4800 'wait for 500 mili secs Waitms 500 'the pins we use

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference 'connect a 4K7 resistor from the data pin to VCC Config 1wire = P1.0 'we Dim 'we Dim need an array of 8 bytes to hold the result Ar(8) As Byte also need a counter variable and a word variable I As Byte , W As Word

85

'some ids of 1wire chips I tested ' 01 51 B5 8D 01 00 00 56 ' 01 84 B3 8D 01 00 00 E5 Print "start" 'get the number of connected 1wire device W = 1wirecount(ar(1)) 'print if there was an error and how many sensors are available Print "ERR " ; Err ; " count " ; W 'now get the data from the first 1wire device on the bus Ar(1) = 1wsearchfirst() 'print the ID For I = 1 To 8 Printhex Ar(i); Next Print 'I assume that there are more than 1 1wire devices Do 'get the next device Ar(1) = 1wsearchnext() For I = 1 To 8 Printhex Ar(i); Next Print Loop Until Err = 1 'when ERR is 1 it means there are no more devices ' IMPORTANT : 1wsearchfirst and next functions do require that you use the SAME array 'In this example this is ar(1) 'once you know the ID, you can address a specific device End

6.7

1WSEARCHFIRST Action
This statement reads the first ID from the 1wire bus into a variable array.

Syntax
var2 = 1WSEARCHFIRST( )

Remarks
var2 A variable or array that should be at least 8 bytes long and that will be assigned with the 8 byte ID from the first 1wire device on the bus.

The 1wireSearchFirst() function must be called once to initiate the ID retrieval process. After the 1wireSearchFirst() function is used you should use successive

2013 MCS Electronics

86

BASCOM-8051 function calls to the 1wireSearchNext function to retrieve other ID's on the bus. A string can not be assigned to get the values from the bus. This because a null may be returned as a value and the null is also used as a string terminator. We advice to use a byte array as shown in the example. The ERR bit is set when there are no 1wire devices found.

See also
1WIRE
83

, 1WIRECOUNT

84

, 1WSEARCHNEXT

87

Example
'---------------------------------------------------------------------' 1wirecount.bas ' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics ' demonstration of using multiple devices '-------------------------------------------------------------------------'chip we use $regfile = "89s8252.dat" 'crystal attached $crystal = 12000000 'baud rate $baud = 4800 'wait for 500 mili secs Waitms 500 'the pins we use 'connect a 4K7 resistor from the data pin to VCC Config 1wire = P1.0 'we need an array of 8 bytes to hold the result Dim Ar(8) As Byte 'we also need a counter variable and a word variable Dim I As Byte , W As Word 'some ids of 1wire chips I tested ' 01 51 B5 8D 01 00 00 56 ' 01 84 B3 8D 01 00 00 E5 Print "start" 'get the number of connected 1wire device W = 1wirecount(ar(1)) 'print if there was an error and how many sensors are available Print "ERR " ; Err ; " count " ; W 'now get the data from the first 1wire device on the bus Ar(1) = 1wsearchfirst() 'print the ID For I = 1 To 8 Printhex Ar(i); Next Print 'I assume that there are more than 1 1wire devices Do

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference 'get the next device Ar(1) = 1wsearchnext() For I = 1 To 8 Printhex Ar(i); Next Print Loop Until Err = 1 'when ERR is 1 it means there are no more devices ' IMPORTANT : 1wsearchfirst and next functions do require that you use the SAME array 'In this example this is ar(1) 'once you know the ID, you can address a specific device End

87

6.8

1WSEARCHNEXT Action
This statement reads the next ID from the 1wire bus into a variable array.

Syntax
var2 = 1WSEARCHNEXT( )

Remarks
var2 A variable or array that should be at least 8 bytes long that will be assigned with the 8 byte ID from the next 1wire device on the bus.

The 1wireSearchFirst() function must be called once to initiate the ID retrieval process. After the 1wireSearchFirst() function is used you should use successive function calls to the 1wireSearchNext function to retrieve other ID's on the bus. A string can not be assigned to get the values from the bus. This because a null may be returned as a value and the null is also used as a string terminator. I would advice to use a byte array as shown in the example. The ERR variable is set when there are no more devices found.

See also
1WIRE
83

, 1WSEARCHFIRST

85

, 1WIRECOUNT

84

Example
'-------------------------------------------------------------------------' 1wirecount.bas ' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics ' demonstration of using multiple devices '------------------------------------------------------------------------'chip we use $regfile = "89s8252.dat" 'crystal attached $crystal = 12000000

2013 MCS Electronics

88

BASCOM-8051

'baud rate $baud = 4800 'wait for 500 mili secs Waitms 500 'the pins we use 'connect a 4K7 resistor from the data pin to VCC Config 1wire = P1.0 'we Dim 'we Dim need an array of 8 bytes to hold the result Ar(8) As Byte also need a counter variable and a word variable I As Byte , W As Word

'some ids of 1wire chips I tested ' 01 51 B5 8D 01 00 00 56 ' 01 84 B3 8D 01 00 00 E5 Print "start" 'get the number of connected 1wire device W = 1wirecount(ar(1)) 'print if there was an error and how many sensors are available Print "ERR " ; Err ; " count " ; W 'now get the data from the first 1wire device on the bus Ar(1) = 1wsearchfirst() 'print the ID For I = 1 To 8 Printhex Ar(i); Next Print 'I assume that there are more than 1 1wire devices Do 'get the next device Ar(1) = 1wsearchnext() For I = 1 To 8 Printhex Ar(i); Next Print Loop Until Err = 1 'when ERR is 1 it means there are no more devices ' IMPORTANT : 1wsearchfirst and next functions do require that you use the SAME array 'In this example this is ar(1) 'once you know the ID, you can address a specific device End

6.9

$ASM - $END ASM Action

Start of inline assembly code block.

Syntax
$ASM

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

89

Remarks
Use $ASM together with $END ASM to insert a block of assembler code in your BASIC code. You can also insert ASM code by preceding the line with the ! sign.

See also
ASM programming
239

Example
Dim c as Byte $ASM Mov r0,#{C} ;address of c Mov a,#1 Mov @r0,a ;store 1 into var c $END ASM Print c End

6.10

$BAUD Action
Instruct the compiler to override the baud rate setting from the options menu.

Syntax
$BAUD = var

Remarks
Var The baud rate that you want to use. Var must be a numeric constant.

When you want to use a crystal/baud rate that can't be selected from the options, you can use this compiler directive. You must also use the $CRYSTAL 92 directive. These statements always work together. In the generated report you can view which baud rate is actually generated. But the baud rate is only shown when RS-232 statements are used like PRINT, INPUT etc.

See also
$CRYSTAL
92

Example
$baud = 2400 $crystal = 14000000 Print "Hello" End ' 14 MHz crystal

2013 MCS Electronics

90

BASCOM-8051

6.11

$BGF Action
Binds a BASCOM Graphic File into the program for use with Graphic LCD displays.

Syntax
$BGF "file"

Remarks
"file" is the name of the BGF file that is included in the program, BMP files can be converted with the Tools Graphic Converter 54 .

See also
SHOWPIC
220

Example
'----------------------------------------------------------------------------' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics ' GLCD.BAS ' Sample to show support for T6963C based graphic display ' Only 240*64 display is supported with 30 columns(yet) ' At the moment the display can only be used in PORT mode ' Connection : ' P1.0 - P1.7 to DB0-DB7 of LCD ' P3.2 to FS, font select of LCD can be hard wired too ' P3.5 to CE, chip enable of LCD ' P3.4 to CD, code/data select of LCD ' P3.6 to WR of LCD ' P3.7 to RD of LCD 'A future version will allow external data access too which also uses RD and WR 'The display from www.conrad.com needs a negative voltage for the contrast. 'I used two 9 V batteries '----------------------------------------------------------------------------'configure the LCD display Config Graphlcd = 240 * 64 , Port = P1 , Ce = P3.5 , Cd = P3.4 , Cols = 30 'dimension some variables used by the DEMO Dim X As Byte , Y As Byte ' Reset P3.2 wide char is 30 columns 'The following statements are supported: Cls clear graphic and text 'cls TEXT will clear only the text 'cls GRAPH will clear only the graphic part 'To init the display manual you can use: '8 bit

'will

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference 'Lcdinit 'But this should not be needed as it is initilised at start up.

91

'Locate is supported and you can use 1-8 for the row and 1-30 for the column Locate 1 , 1 'cursor control is the same as for normal LCD Cursor On Blink 'And to show some text you can use LCD Lcd "Hello world" 'Note that the cursor position is not adjusted. You can set it with locate 'Now comes the fun part for using a graphic LCD 'We can display a BMP file. You may use MSPAINT or any other tool that can create 'a BMP file. With the Graphic converter from the Tools Menu you can convert the file 'into a BGF file. (BASCOM GRAPHICS FILE). The conversion will convert all non white 'pixels to BLACK. 'To display the BGF file you use the SHOWPIC statement that needs an X and Y parameter 'the third param is the label where the data is stored. 'The position must be divideble by 8 because this is the way the display handles the data Showpic 0 , 0 , Picture1 'And we use the PSET known from QB to set or reset a single pixel 'A value of 0 means clear the pixel and 1 means set the pixel 'create a block For X = 0 To 10 For Y = 0 To 10 Pset X , Y , 1 Next Next 'You could remove it too For X = 0 To 10 For Y = 0 To 10 Step 2 Pset X , Y , 0 Next Next 'A simple scope or data logger could be made with PSET ! 'We hope to get an AN from an inspired user :-) End 'label for the picture Picture1: '$BGF includes the data from the specified file $bgf "samples\mcs.bgf"

2013 MCS Electronics

92

BASCOM-8051

6.12

$CRYSTAL Action
Instruct the compiler to override the crystal frequency options setting.

Syntax
$CRYSTAL = var

Remarks
var Frequency of the crystal. var : Constant. When you want to use an unsupported crystal/baud rate you can use this compiler directive. When you do, you must also use the corresponding $BAUD 89 directive. These statements always work together.

See also
$BAUD
89

Example
$baud = 2400 $crystal = 14000000 Print "Hello" End ' 14 MHz crystal

6.13

$DEFAULT XRAM Action

Compiler directive to handle each dimensioned variable as XRAM variable.

Syntax
$DEFAULT XRAM | IRAM

Remarks
When you are using many XRAM variables it make sense to set this option, so you don't have to type XRAM each time. To dimension a variable to be stored into IRAM, specify IRAM in that case.

See Also
DIM
141

Example
$default Xram

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference Dim X As Integer Dim Z As Iram Integer 'will go to XRAM 'will be stored in IRAM

93

6.14

$EXTERNAL Action
Compiler directive that instructs the compiler to include the specified assembler routines.

Syntax
$EXTERNAL myrout [, other]

Remarks
The $EXTERNAL directive is used internally by the compiler in order to enable the customizing of the assembler routines by the user. You can use it to include your own assembler routines. At the moment using $EXTERNAL will always include the routine no matter if it is used or not.

See also
$LIB
95

, LIB Manager

55

Example
$LIB "mylib.lib" $EXTERNAL _dec76

6.15

$INCLUDE Action
Includes an ASCII file in the program at the current position.

Syntax
$INCLUDE "file"

Remarks
file Name of the ASCII file which must contain valid BASCOM statements. This option can be used if you make use of the same routines in many programs. You can write modules and include them into your program. If there are changes to make you only have to change the module file, not all your BASCOM programs. You can only include ASCII files!

Example
'-------------------------------------------------------------' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics '-------------------------------------------------------------' file: INCLUDE.BAS

2013 MCS Electronics

94

BASCOM-8051 ' demo: $INCLUDE '-------------------------------------------------------------Print "INCLUDE.BAS" $include "123.bas" 'include file that prints Hello Print "Back in INCLUDE.BAS" End

6.16

$IRAMSTART Action
Compiler directive to specify starting internal memory location.

Syntax
$IRAMSTART = constant

Remarks
Constant A constant with the starting value (0-255)

See also
$NOINIT
98

, $RAMSTART

103

Example
$NOINIT $NOSP $IRAMSTART = &H60 SP = 80 DIM I As Integer 'first usable memory location

6.17

$LARGE Action
Instructs the compiler that LCALL statements must be used.

Syntax
$LARGE

Remarks
Internally when a subroutine is called the ACALL statement is used. The ACALL instruction needs only 2 bytes (the LCALL needs 3 bytes) The ACALL statement however can only address routines with a maximal offset of 2048 within the page. AT89C2051 chips will have no problems with that. When code is generated for another uP, the subroutine being called can be further away and you will receive an error. With the $LARGE statement you instruct the compiler to use the LCALL statement which can address the full 64K address space.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

95

Example
$LARGE 'I received an error 148 so I need this option

6.18

$LIB Action
Compiler directive that instructs the compiler to look for assembler routines in the specified LIB file.

Syntax
$LIB "myrout.LIB"

Remarks
The $LIB directive is used internally by the compiler in order to enable the customizing of the assembler routines by the user. You can use it to specify your own libraries. You can for example copy the mcs.lib file to a new file named mylib.lib and delete the content of the mcs.lib file. This way the compiler will use your routines. The mcs.lib file must exist in the \LIB subdirectory and that is why you may not delete it. Always make a backup of the mcs.lib file before you change it. It is not encouraged to change the mcs.lib file itself other than making a dummy because updates will contain more asm routines and you have to change everything for each update.

See also
$EXTERNAL
93

Example
$LIB "mylib.lib" $EXTERNAL _dec76

6.19

$LCD Action
Instruct the compiler to generate code for 8-bit LCD displays attached to the data bus.

Syntax
$LCD = [&H]address

Remarks
address The address where must be written to, to enable the LCD display. The db0-db7 lines of the LCD must be connected to the datelines D0D7. The RS line of the LCD must be connected to the address line A0.

2013 MCS Electronics

96

BASCOM-8051

On systems with external RAM/ROM it makes more sense to attach the LCD to the data bus. With an address decoder you can select the LCD display.

See Also
$LCDRS
96

Example
$lcd = &HA000 the LCD high. Cls Lcd "Hello world" End 'writing to this address will make the E line of

6.20

$LCDRS Action
Instruct the compiler to generate code for 8-bit LCD displays attached to the data bus.

Syntax
$LCDRS = [&H]address

Remarks
Address The address where must be written to, to enable the LCD display and the RS of the LCD. The db0-db7 lines of the LCD must be connected to the data lines D0D7. The RS line of the LCD must be connected to the address line A0 by default. When it is connected to another address line you can specify $LCDRS On systems with external RAM/ROM it makes more sense to attach the LCD to the data bus. With an address decoder you can select the LCD display.

See Also
$LCD
95

Example
$lcd = &H8000 the LCD high. $lcdrs = &H8002 the LCD high. Cls Lcd "Elektor" 'writing to this address will make the E line of 'writing to this address will make the RS line of

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference End

97

6.21

$MAP Action
Generates info in the report file with hexadecimal address of each source line.

Syntax
$MAP

Remarks
For debugging it can be useful to know at which address a source line begins.

See also
NONE

Example
$MAP Print "Hello" Print "Test" Will generate the following section in the report file : Code map ----------------------------------------------------------Line Address(hex) ----------------------------------------------------------2 52 3 69 5 80

6.22

$NOBREAK Action
Instruct the compiler that BREAK statements must not be compiled.

Syntax
$NOBREAK

Remarks
With the BREAK statement, you can generate a reserved opcode that is used by the simulator to pause the simulation. When you want to compile without these opcode's you don't have to remove the BREAK statement: you can use the $NOBREAK statement to achieve the same.

2013 MCS Electronics

98

BASCOM-8051

See also
BREAK
113

Example
$nobreak Break not pause End ' this isn't compiled into code so the simulator will

6.23

$NOINIT Action
Instruct the compiler that no initialization must be performed.

Syntax
$NOINIT

Remarks
BASCOM initializes the processor depending on the used statements. When you want to handle this by yourself you can specify this with the compiler directive $NOINIT. The only initialization that is always done is the setting of the stack pointer and the initialization of the LCD display (if LCD statements are used). When you have selected the Altair as a monitor in the Monitor options, the following code will be generated: Mov IE,#255 Mov scon,#82 This because the Altair monitor needs this code despite of the $NOINIT. When you do not want that, you have to select HEX Monitor for example.

See also
$NOSP
100

, $NORAMCLEAR

99

Example
$NONIT $NORAMCLEAR 99 'your program goes here End

6.24

$NONAN Action
Compiler directive for changing NAN (not a number) into 0.0

Syntax
$NONAN

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

99

Remarks
A single can return a NAN when it is not considered to be a number. With the $NONAN directive 0.0 will be returned.

See also
NONE

Example
NONE

6.25

$NONULL Action
Compiler directive for changing the behavior of the DATA statements.

Syntax
$NONULL = value

Remarks
value 0 for default behavior. And -1 for special behavior

When a string is stored with a DATA statement, a null is added to indicate the string end. In some situations you might not want this. When you write a custom routine to work with a long string for example. With $NONULL = -1 , the additional null byte is not added. To switch back to normal mode use a value of 0.

See also
NONE

Example
$nonull = -1 Lbl: Data "test" , "this" Lbl2: $nonull = 0 Data "test" , "this"

'normal mode

6.26

$NORAMCLEAR Action
Instruct the compiler that the internal RAM should not be cleared at start up.

Syntax
2013 MCS Electronics

100

BASCOM-8051 $NORAMCLEAR

Remarks
BASCOM clears the internal memory after a reset. When you dont want this behavior you can use the $NORAMCLEAR compiler directive.

See also
NONE

Example
$NORAMCLEAR your code goes here End

6.27

$NOSP Action
Instruct the compiler that the stack pointer must not be set.

Syntax
$NOSP

Remarks
BASCOM initializes the processor depending on the used statements. When you want to handle this by yourself you can specify this with the compiler directive $NOINIT. The only initialization that is always done is the setting of the stack pointer and the initialization of the LCD display (if LCD statements are used). With the $NOSP directive the stack will not be initialized either.

See also
$NOINIT
98

Example
$NOSP $NOINIT End

6.28

$OBJ Action
Includes Intel object code.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

101

Syntax
$OBJ obj

Remarks
obj is the object code to include. In some cases it can be useful to include object code. This object code can be generated with other tools.

Example
$OBJ D291 'this is equivalent to SET P1.1

6.29

$RAMSIZE Action
Specifies the size of the external RAM memory.

Syntax
$RAMSIZE = [&H] size

Remarks
Size Size of external RAM memory chip. size : Constant.

See also
$RAMSTART
103

Example
$ROMSTART = &H4000 $RAMSTART = 0 $RAMSIZE = &H1000 DIM x AS XRAM Byte

'specify XRAM to store variable in XRAM

6.30

$RAMTRON Action
Tell the compiler to use SPI memory as XRAM.

Syntax
$RAMTRON

Remarks

2013 MCS Electronics

102

BASCOM-8051 address The (hex)-address where the data is stored. Or the lowest address which enables the RAM chip. You can use this option when you want to run your code in systems with external RAM memory. Ramtron (www.ramtron.com) sell EEPROM's that are as fast as normal RAM chips. They can be written billions of times. The $ramtron directive will use such as ramtron device as xram device. This only works for the AT89S8252. You only add a ramtron EEPROM to the hardware SPI lines and when you dim a variable as XRAM, the EEPROM will be used to store and retrieve the data. This is a convenient way to add more memory without adding an address decoder and a RAM chip. Since the EEPROM is housed in a 8 pins chip it will make your design simple. Note however that it is best practice that writing to such a XRAM variable must not be excessive. The data sheet of the Ramtron chips show that you can write it many times and in effect it will take years until you reach the limit. Note that $RAMTRON does not need a parameter.

ASM
When XRAM is written with Movx @dptr,a , a call will be made to _WriteRamtron. Nothing is destroyed or returned. When XRAM is read with Movx a,@dptr , a call will be made to _ReadRamtron. Value is returned in ACC as movx a,@dptr would do too. Both routines are in the mcs.lib file. Both routines call _Wait_Spif to wait for the SPI, SPIF bit.

Example
'------------------------------------------------------' ' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics RAMTRON.BAS

' This example shos how to use the www.ramtron.com eeprom ' to be used a XRAM '------------------------------------------------------'it works only for the 8252 $regfile = "89s8252.dat"

'tell the compiler about ramtron 'THIS SAMPLE WILL NOT SIMULATE beause of the $RAMTON directive 'Suggestion is to add the directive when you simulated your program $ramtron 'dim some variables Dim X As Byte , X1 As Byte

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference 'Now dim XRAM. This will be stored in the Ramtron devic Dim Z(10) As Xram Byte Wait 1

103

'I used P1.3 for the CS so the mcs.lib also uses this pin 'P1.4 could be used too but it needs a change in the mcs.lib 'This sample works actually! 'But since I also have code like *+4 it will not work always 'I need to rewrite that code. Let me know when some routines dont work 'with the $ramtron directive 'fill the data For X = 1 To 10 Z(x) = X Next 'print the data For X = 1 To 10 Print Z(x) Next End

6.31

$RAMSTART Action
Specifies the location of the external RAM memory.

Syntax
$RAMSTART = [&H]address

Remarks
address The (hex)-address where the data is stored. Or the lowest address which enables the RAM chip. You can use this option when you want to run your code in systems with external RAM memory. Address must be a numeric constant.

See also
$RAMSIZE
101

Example
$ROMSTART = &H4000

2013 MCS Electronics

104

BASCOM-8051 $RAMSTART = 0 $RAMSIZE = &H1000

6.32

$REGFILE Action
Instructs the compiler to use the specified register file.

Syntax
$REGFILE = "file"

Remarks
File The name of the register file to use.

The $REGFILE statement must be placed before any other executable statements or compiler directives.

See also
NONE

Example
'comment is no problem before the $REGFILE statement $REGFILE = "8052.DAT" 'use the 8052.DAT file

6.33

$ROMSTART Action
Specifies the location of the ROM memory.

Syntax
$ROMSTART = [&H] address

Remarks
address The (hex)-address where the code must start. Default is 0. This value will be used when $ROMSTART is not specified. You can use this option when you want to test the code in RAM. The code must be uploaded and placed into the specified address and can be called from a monitor program. The monitor program must relocate the interrupts to the correct address! When $ROMSTART = &H4000 is specified the monitor program must perform a LJMP instruction. For address 3 this must be

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

105

&H4003. Otherwise interrupts can not be handled correctly. But that is up to the monitor program.

See also
$RAMSTART
103

Example
$ROMSTART = &H4000 'ROM enabled at 4000 hex

6.34

$SERIALINPUT Action
Specifies that serial input must be redirected.

Syntax
$SERIALINPUT = label

Remarks
Label The name of the assembler routine that must be called when an character is needed from the INPUT routine. The character must be returned in ACC.

With the redirection of the INPUT command, you can use your own routines. This way you can use other devices as input devices. Note that the INPUT statement is terminated when a RETURN code (13) is received.

See also
$SERIALOUTPUT
106

Example
$SERIALINPUT = Myinput 'here goes your program END !myinput: ;perform the needed actions here mov a, sbuf ;serial input buffer to acc ret

6.35

$SERIALINPUT2LCD Action
This compiler directive will redirect all serial input to the LCD display instead of echoing to the serial port.

Syntax
$SERIALINPUT2LCD

2013 MCS Electronics

106

BASCOM-8051

Remarks
You can also write your own custom input or output driver with the $SERIALINPUT and $SERIALOUTPUT statements, but the $SERIALINPUT2LCD is handy when you use a LCD display.

See also
$SERIALINPUT
105

, $SERIALOUTPUT

106

Example
$serialinput2lcd Dim V As Byte Cls Input "Number " , V display 'this will go to the LCD

6.36

$SERIALOUTPUT Action
Specifies that serial output must be redirected.

Syntax
$SERIALOUTPUT = label

Remarks
label The name of the assembler routine that must be called when a character is sent to the serial buffer (SBUF). The character is placed into ACC. With the redirection of the PRINT and other serial output related commands, you can use your own routines. This way you can use other devices as output devices.

See Also
$SERIALINPUT
105

Example
$SERIALOUTPUT = MyOutput 'here goes your program END !myoutput: ;perform the needed actions here mov sbuf, a ;serial output buffer (default) ret

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

107

6.37

$SIM Action
Generates code without the actual waiting loops in order to speed up the simulator.

Syntax
$SIM

Remarks
When simulating the WAIT statement, you will experience that it takes a long time to execute. You can also switch off the updating of variables/source which costs time, but an alternative is the $SIM directive. You must remove the $SIM statement when you want to place your program into a chip/EPROM.

See also
BREAK
113

Example
$SIM WAIT 2 'don't make code for WAIT and WAITMS 'the simulator is faster now

6.38

$TIMEOUT Action
Compiler directive to specify that the TIMEOUT option is used with serial input.

Syntax
$TIMEOUT

Remarks
$TIMEOUT will modify the serial input routine so that it enables you to use the TIMEOUT with the INPUT, INPUTBIN, INPUTHEX etc. statements.

See also
INPUT
173

, GET

207

Example
$TIMEOUT DIM Name as string * 10 REM Now we can use theTIMEOUT option INPUT "Name " , name TIMEOUT = 100000 'enable time out INPUT "Name ", name 'wait until <13> pressed.

2013 MCS Electronics

108

BASCOM-8051

6.39

$WAIT Action
Will insert a one second delay in the startup code.

Syntax
$WAIT

Remarks
When using the AT89C8252 ISP facility it is needed that the chip waits 1 second after reset. Otherwise it can occur that the chip can not be programmed serial anymore. Do not confuse $WAIT with the WAIT statement. $WAIT is only needed for the AT89C8252 !

See also
NONE

Example
$WAIT 'for at89c8252 only

6.40

ALIAS Action
Indicates that the variable can be referenced with another name.

Syntax
newvar ALIAS oldvar

Remarks
Oldvar Newvar Name of the variable such as P1.1 New name of the variable such as direction

Aliasing port pins can give the pin names a more meaningful name. You can also ALIAS a variable: M ALIAS var.0 for example.

See also
CONST
116

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

109

Example
Direction Alias P1.1 with the variable direction Set Direction P1.1 Dim A As Byte M Alias A.0 N Alias A.1 Set M Set N If M = N Then Print "Both bits are set" End If End 'now you can refer to P1.1 'has the same effect as SET

6.41

ABS Action
Returns the absolute value of a numeric variable.

Syntax
var = ABS(var2)

Remarks
var Var2 Variable that is assigned the absolute value of var2. Var must be a numeric variable. The source variable to retrieve the absolute value from. Var2 must be an integer or long.

The absolute value of a number is always positive.

See also
NONE

Example
Dim a as Integer, c as Integer a = -1000 c = Abs(a) Print c End

Output
1000

2013 MCS Electronics

110

BASCOM-8051

6.42

ASC Action
Convert a string into its ASCII value.

Syntax
var = ASC(string)

Remarks
var String Target variable that is assigned. String variable or constant to retrieve the ASCII value from.

var : Byte, Integer, Word, Long. string : String, Constant. Note that only the first character of the string will be used. When the string is empty, a zero will be returned.

See also
CHR
114

Example
Dim A As Byte , S As String * 10 S = "Abc" A = Asc(s) Print A End

Output
65

6.43

AVG Action
Returns the average value of a byte array.

Syntax
var = AVG( ar(1) )

Remarks
Var ar() Numeric variable that will be assigned with the lowest value of the array. The first array element of the array to return the lowest value of.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

111

At the moment AVG() works only with BYTE arrays. Support for other data types will be added too.

See also
MAX
190

, MIN

192

Example
Dim ar(10) As Byte Dim bP as Byte For bP = 1 to 10 ar(bP) = bP Next bP = Avg(ar(1)) Print bP End

6.44

BAUD Action
Instruct the compiler to set a new baud rate at run time.

Syntax
BAUD = var

Remarks
Var The baud rate that you want to use.

var : Constant. When you want to use a crystal/baud rate that can't be selected from the options, you can assign this special variable. Do not confuse it with the $BAUD 89 directive!

See also
$CRYSTAL
92

, $BAUD

89

Example
$BAUD = 2400 $CRYSTAL = 14000000 PRINT "Hello" BAUD = 9600 Print "Hello" END ' 14 MHz crystal

2013 MCS Electronics

112

BASCOM-8051

6.45

BCD Action
Converts a variable into its BCD value.

Syntax
PRINT BCD( var ) LCD BCD( var )

Remarks
Var Variable to convert. This must be a numeric variable or constant.

When you want to use a I2C clock device which stores its values as BCD values you can use this function to print the value correctly. BCD() will displays values with a trailing zero. The BCD() function is intended for the PRINT/LCD statements. Use the MAKEBCD function to convert variables.

See also
MAKEBCD
189

, MAKEDEC

189

Example
Dim A As Byte A = 65 Lcd A Lowerline Lcd Bcd(a) End

6.46

BITWAIT Action
Wait until a bit is set or reset.

Syntax
BITWAIT x SET | RESET

Remarks
x Bit variable or internal register like P1.x , where x ranges form 0-7. When using bit variables be sure that they are set/reset by software. When you use internal registers that can be set/reset by hardware such as P1.0 this doesn't apply.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

113

See also
NONE

Example
Dim A As Bit Bitwait A , Set Bitwait P1.7 , Reset is 0. End 'wait until bit a is set 'wait until bit 7 of Port 1

ASM
BITWAIT P1.0 , SET will generate : Jnb h'91,*+0 BITWAIT P1.0 , RESET will generate : Jb h'91,*+0

6.47

BREAK Action
Generates a reserved opcode to pause the simulator.

Syntax
BREAK

Remarks
You can set a breakpoint in the simulator but you can also set a breakpoint from code using the BREAK statement. Be sure to remove the BREAK statements when you debugged your program or use the $NOBREAK directive. The reserved opcode used is A5.

See also
$NOBREAK
97

Example
PRINT "Hello" BREAK End 'the simulator will pause now

6.48

CALL Action
Call and execute a subroutine.

2013 MCS Electronics

114

BASCOM-8051

Syntax
CALL Test [(var1, var-n)]

Remarks
var1 var-n Test Any BASCOM variable or constant. Any BASCOM variable or constant. Name of the subroutine. In this case Test

With the CALL statement you can call a procedure or subroutine. As much as 10 parameters can be passed but you can also call a subroutine without parameters. For example : Call Test2 The call statement enables you to implement your own statements. You don't have to use the CALL statement: Test2 will also call subroutine test2 When you don't supply the CALL statement, you must leave out the parenthesis. So Call Routine(x,y,z) must be written as Routine x,y,z

See also
DECLARE
139

, SUB

229

Example
Dim A As Byte , Bb As Byte Declare Sub Test(bb As Byte) A = 65 Call Test(a) Test A End Sub Test(bb As Byte) declared one Lcd Bb Lowerline Lcd Bcd(bb) End Sub 'call test with parameter A 'alternative call 'use the same variable as the 'put it on the LCD

6.49

CHR Action
Convert a byte, Integer/Word variable or a constant to a character.

Syntax
PRINT CHR(var) s = CHR(var)

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

115

Remarks
Var S Byte, Integer/Word variable or numeric constant. A string variable.

When you want to print a character to the screen or the LCD display, you must convert it with the CHR() function.

See also
ASC
110

Example
Dim A As Byte A = 65 Lcd A Lowerline Lcdhex A Lcd Chr(a) End

6.50

CLS Action
Clear the LCD display and set the cursor home.

Syntax
CLS

Syntax for graphic LCD

CLS TEXT CLS GRAPH CLS BOTH

Remarks
Clearing the LCD display does not clear the CG-RAM in which the custom characters are stored.

See also
$LCD
95

, LCD

178

Example
Cls Lcd "Hello" Wait 5 Cls End

2013 MCS Electronics

116

BASCOM-8051

6.51

CONST Action
Declares a symbolic constant.

Syntax
CONST symbol = value

Remarks
symbol Value The name of the symbol. The value to assign to the symbol.

Assigned constants consume no program memory. The compiler will replace all occurrences of the symbol with the assigned value. Value may also be an expression that uses other defined constants. The functions that may be used for the expressions are : ASC , ABS, ATN, COS , EXP , FIX, INT , LOG, RND , SGN , SIN ,SQR , TAN. Operators are : AND, OR ,XOR +, - , / , \ , ^ , * , NOT , > , < , = , >= , <=,<> , (, )

See also
DIM
141

Example
'---------------------------------------------------' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics ' CONST.BAS '---------------------------------------------------Dim A As Const 5 'declare a as a constant Dim B1 As Const &B1001 Dim S As Single 'Or use the new preferred syntax Const Cbyte = &HF Const Cint = -1000 Const Csingle = 1.1 Const Cstring = "test" S = Csingle Print S ; " Waitms A Print A Print B1 End " ; Cstring 'wait for 5 milliseconds

6.52

CONFIG
The config statement configures all kind of hardware related statements. Select one of the following topics to learn more about a specific config statement. CONFIG TIMER0, TIMER1
131

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG TIMER2 289 (for 8052 compatible chips) LCD 125 LCDBUS 126 LCDPIN 125 BAUD 119 1WIRE 117 SDA 128 SCL 128 DEBOUNCE 120 WATCHDOG 132 SPI 130 I2CDELAY 120 MICROWIRE 127 SERVOS 129 ADUC812 117 GETRC 121 PRINT 127 GRAPHLCD 121

117

6.53

CONFIG 1WIRE Action

Configure the pin to use for 1WIRE statements.

Syntax
CONFIG 1WIRE = pin

Remarks
pin The port pin to use such as P1.0

See also
1WRESET
83

, 1WREAD

83

, 1WWRITE

83

Example
Config 1WIRE = P1.0 1WRESET 'P1.0 is used for the 1-wire bus 'reset the bus

6.54

CONFIG ADUC812 Action

Configures the ADUC812 microprocessor.

Syntax for ADC

Config ADUC812 = ADCON , MODE = mode, CLOCK = clock , AQUISITION = aq , TIMER2 = tm , EXTRIG = value

Syntax for DAC

2013 MCS Electronics

118

BASCOM-8051 Config ADUC812 = DAC , MODE = mode, RANGE0 = r0 , RANGE1 = r1 , CLEAR0 = clr0 , CLEAR1 = clr1 , SYNC = sync, POWER0 = pwr0, POWER1 = pwr1

Remarks ADC
mode clock POWERDOWN, NORMAL, PDNE, STANDBY. PDNE means POWERDOWN if not executing a conversion cycle. This is a constant that specifies the clock division of the master clock. It may be 1,2,4 or 8. An ADC conversion will require 16 ADC clocks in addition to the selected number of acquisition clocks. aq This is a constant that specifies the time available for the input/track hold amplifier to acquire the input signal. It may be in range from 1-4. 1 Acquisition clock is enough for an impedance up to 8K tm2 value The TIMER2 can be ENABLED or DISABLED. When enabled the timer2 overflow serves as a trigger for the AD conversion. The external trigger may be ENABLED or DISABLED. When enabled the external pin 23 (CONVST) can start the conversion while it is low.

Remarks DAC
Mode r0 r1 clr0 clr1 Sync The DAC can be in 8 bit mode or 12 bit mode. So the parameter may be 8 or 12. Both DACS are set with this parameter. The DAC0 range can be set to VDD or VREF. With VDD the range is from 0-VDD. For VREF it is 0-VREF. The DAC1 range can be set to VDD or VREF. With VDD the range is from 0-VDD. For VREF it is 0-VREF This parameter when TRUE will clear the DAC0. This will set the output voltage to 0 V. This parameter when TRUE will clear the DAC1. This will set the output voltage to 0 V May be ENABLED or DISABLED. While enabled the DAC outputs as soon as the DACxL SFR's are written. The user can simutaneously update both DAC's by first updating the DACxL/H SFR's while SYNC is disabled. Both DACs will then update when the SYNC is enabled. This parameter when ON will power ON the DAC0. When OFF the DAC0 is powered OFF. This parameter when ON will power ON the DAC1. When OFF the DAC1 is powered OFF

pwr0 pwr1

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

119

6.55

CONFIG BAUD Action

Configure the uP to select the intern baud rate generator. This baud rate generator is only available in the 80515, 80517, 80535, 80537 and compatible chips.

Syntax
CONFIG BAUD = baud rate

Remarks
Baud rate Baud rate to use : 4800 or 9600

Example
CONFIG BAUD = 9600 Print "Hello" End 'use internal baud generator

6.56

CONFIG BAUD1 Action

Configure the uP to select the internal baud rate generator for serial channel 1. This baud rate generator is only available in the 80517 and 80537.

Syntax
CONFIG BAUD1 = baudrate

Remarks
Baudrate Baud rate to use : 2048 - 37500 The 80517 and 80537 have 2 serial ports on board.

See also
CONFIG BAUD
119

Example
CONFIG BAUD1 = 9600 'use internal baud generator OPEN "Com2:" for Binary as #1 Print #1, "Hello" Close #1 End

2013 MCS Electronics

120

BASCOM-8051

6.57

CONFIG DEBOUNCE Action

Configures the delay time for the DEBOUNCE statement.

Syntax
CONFIG DEBOUNCE = time

Remarks
time A numeric constant which specifies the delay time in mS.

When the debounce time is not configured, 25 mS will be used as a default. Note that the delay time is based on a 12 MHz clock frequency.

See also
DEBOUNCE
137

Example
Config Debounce = 25 mS '25 mS is the default

6.58

CONFIG I2CDELAY Action

Configures the delay for the I2C clock.

Syntax
CONFIG I2CDELAY = value

Remarks
Value A numeric constant. 1 will generate the default clock. 0 will generate a higher clock and >=2 will generate a lower clock frequency. By default the following delay routine is called with an ACALL : Delay5: Nop Ret For 12 MHz, there is a 1 MHz system clock. So not counting the other statement, the minimal delay is 4 * 2 = 8 cycles. The I2Cdelay value will insert the number of specified NOP instructions. By default the settings are right for all I2C devices and when working with a 12 MHz crystal.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

121

See also
CONFIG SCL
128

, CONFIG SDA

128

Example
CONFIG I2CDELAY = 0 'we need a higher clock

6.59

CONFIG GETRC Action

Configures the GETRC() charge time.

Syntax
Config GETRC = time

Remarks
Time The time in milli seconds to charge the capacitor

See also
GETRC
158

6.60

CONFIG GRAPHLCD Action

Configures the Graphical LCD display.

Syntax
Config GRAPHLCD = type , PORT = mode, CE = pin , CD = cd , COLS = 30

Remarks
Type This must be one of the following : 240 * 64 240 * 128 mode This is the name of the port that is used to put the data on the LCD data pins db0-db7. P1 for example. Ce Cd Cols The name of the pin that is used to enable the chip on the LCD. The name of the pin that is used to control the CD pin of the display. The number of columns for use as text display. The current code is written for 30 columns only.

In the sample the following connections were used:

2013 MCS Electronics

122

BASCOM-8051 P1.0 to P1.7 to DB0-DB7 of the LCD P3.2 P3.5 P3.4 P3.6 P3.7 to FS, font select of LCD can be hard wired too to CE, chip enable of LCD to CD, code/data select of LCD to WR of LCD, write to RD of LCD, read

The LCD used from www.conrad.de needs a negative voltage for the contrast. Two 9V batteries were used with a pot meter. The FS (font select) must be set low to use 30 columns and 8x8 fonts. It may be connected to ground. This pin is not used by the software routines. The current asm code only support 30 columns. You can change it however to use 40 columns. The T6963C displays have both a graphical area and a text area. They can be used together. The routines use the XOR mode to display both text and graphics layered over each other. The statements that can be used with the graphical LCD are : CLS
115

, will clear the graphic display and the text display

CLS GRAPH will clear only the graphic part of the display CLS TEXT will only clear the text part of the display CLS BOTH is the same as CLS and will clear both text and graphics. LOCATE column
185

row,column Will place the cursor at the specified row and

The row may vary from 1 to 8 and the column from 1 to 30. CURSOR 135 ON/OFF BLINK/NOBLINK can be used the same way as for text displays. LCD
178

can also be the same way as for text displays.

182

LCDHEX New are:

can also be used the same way as for text display

SHOWPIC 220 X, Y , Label where X and Y are the column and row and Label is the label where the picture info is placed. PSET 207 X, Y , color Will set or reset a pixel. X can range from 0-239 and Y from 9-63. When color is 0 the pixel will turned off. When it is 1 the pixel will be set on. $BGF
90

"file.bgf" 'inserts a BGF file at the current location

$TIFF is removed from the Help but it still supported this version. $BGF should be used however.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

123

Example
'-----------------------------------------------------------------------------' ' ' ' ' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics GLCD.BAS Sample to show support for T6963C based graphic display Only 240*64 display is supported with 30 columns(yet) At the moment the display can only be used in PORT mode

' Connection : ' P1.0 - P1.7 to DB0-DB7 of LCD ' P3.2 ' P3.5 ' P3.4 ' P3.6 ' P3.7 to FS, font select of LCD can be hard wired too to CE, chip enable of LCD to CD, code/data select of LCD to WR of LCD to RD of LCD

'A future version will allow external data access too which also uses RD and WR 'The display from www.conrad.com needs a negative voltage for the contrast. 'I used two 9 V batteries '-----------------------------------------------------------------------------'configure the LCD display Config Graphlcd = 240 * 64 , Port = P1 , Ce = P3.5 , Cd = P3.4 , Cols = 30 'dimension some variables used by the DEMO Dim X As Byte , Y As Byte ' Reset P3.2 '8 bit wide char is 30 columns

'The following statements are supported: Cls 'cls TEXT will clear only the text 'cls GRAPH will clear only the graphic part 'To init the display manual you can use: 'Lcdinit 'But this should not be needed as it is initilised at start up. 'Locate is supported and you can use 1-8 for the row and 1-30 for the column Locate 1 , 1 'cursor control is the same as for normal LCD Cursor On Blink 'will clear graphic and text

2013 MCS Electronics

124

BASCOM-8051 'And to show some text you can use LCD Lcd "Hello world" 'Note that the cursor position is not adjusted. You can set it with locate 'Now comes the fun part for using a graphic LCD 'We can display a BMP file. You may use MSPAINT or any other tool that can create 'a BMP file. With the Graphic converter from the Tools Menu you can convert the file 'into a BGF file. (BASCOM GRAPHICS FILE). The conversion will convert all non white 'pixels to BLACK. 'To display the BGF file you use the SHOWPIC statement that needs an X and Y parameter 'the third param is the label where the data is stored. 'The position must be dividable by 8 because this is the way the display handles the data Showpic 0 , 0 , Picture1 'And we use the PSET known from QB to set or reset a single pixel 'A value of 0 means clear the pixel and 1 means set the pixel 'create a block For X = 0 To 10 For Y = 0 To 10 Pset X , Y , 1 Next Next 'You could remove it too For X = 0 To 10 For Y = 0 To 10 Step 2 Pset X , Y , 0 Next Next 'A simple scope or data logger could be made with PSET ! 'We hope to get an AN from an inspired user :-) End 'label for the picture Picture1: '$BGF includes the data from the specified file $bgf "samples\mcs.bgf"

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

125

6.61

CONFIG LCDPIN Action

Override the LCD-options to store the settings in your program.

Syntax
CONFIG LCDPIN = PIN, DB4= P1.1,DB5=P1.2,DB6=P1.3,DB7=P1.4,E=P1.5, RS=P1.6

Remarks
P1.1 etc. are just an example in the syntax. The pins of the LCD display that must be connected in PIN mode are : Name LCD Display DB4 DB4 DB5 DB5 DB6 DB6 DB7 DB7 E E RS RS The WR line of the display must be connected to GND.

See also
CONFIG LCD
125

Example
CONFIG LCDPIN = PIN ,DB4= P1.1,DB5=P1.2,DB6=P1.3,DB7=P1.4,E=P1.5, RS=P1.6

6.62

CONFIG LCD Action

Configure the LCD display.

Syntax
CONFIG LCD = LCDtype

Remarks
LCDtype The type of LCD display used. This can be : 40 * 4, 40 * 2, 16 * 1, 16 * 1a, 16 * 2, 16 * 4, 16 * 4, 20 * 2 or 20 * 4 or 40 * 4a Default 16 * 2 is assumed. The 16 * 1a LCD display is a special one. It is intended for the display that has the memory organized as 2 lines of 8 characters.

2013 MCS Electronics

126

BASCOM-8051 The 40 * 4a LCD display is also a special one. It has two ENABLE lines. The CONFIG LCDPIN directive must be used to configure the second E line: CONFIG LCDPIN = PIN , E1 = Pin, E2 = pin, etc. To select between E1 and E2 you need to set the B register. Mov b,#0 Mov b,#1 'selects E1 'selects E2

LCD with a constant will work and also with strings. To call the low level routines : Mov a,#2 ; code into acc Mov B,#0 ; or use Mov b,#1 Acall LCD_CONTROL ; call routine To send data use the low level routine WRITE_LCD instead of LCD_CONTROL Most LCD routines will work with the 40*4a display but some will fail. In that case you need to use the low level ASM routines as shown above.

Example
REM Sample for normal displays CONFIG LCD = 40 * 4 LCD "Hello" 'display on LCD FOURTHLINE 'select line 4 LCD "4" 'display 4 END

6.63

CONFIG LCDBUS Action

Configures the LCD databus.

Syntax
CONFIG LCDBUS = constant

Remarks
constant 4 for 4-bit operation, 8 for 8-bit mode (default)

Use this statement together with the $LCD = address statement. When you use the LCD display in the bus mode the default is to connect all the data lines. With the 4-bit mode you only have to connect data lines d7-d4.

See also
CONFIG LCD
125

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

127

Example
$LCD = &H8000 Config LCDBUS = 4 LCD "hello" 'address of enable signal '4 bit mode

6.64

CONFIG MICROWIRE Action

Configures the micro wire pins.

Syntax
Config Microwire = Pin , Cs = P1.1 , Din = P1.2 , Dout = P1.4 , Clock = P1.5 , Al =7

Remarks
CS DIN DOUT CLOCK AL Chip select Data input Data output Pin that generates the Clock Address lines. See table below. It depends if you work with bytes or words. In our example we will use the 93C46 and work with bytes. AL will be 7 in this case.

Chip Data bits AL

93C46 8 7 16 6

93C56 8 9 16 8

93C57 8 8 16 7

93C66 8 9 16 8

See also
MWINIT
193

, MWWOPCODE

194

, MWWRITE

195

, MWREAD

193

Example
NONE

6.65

CONFIG PRINT Action

Configures the PRINT statement.

Syntax
Config PRINT = pin

2013 MCS Electronics

128

BASCOM-8051 Config PRINTMODE = mode

Remarks
Pin Mode The pin to use for the output control such as P3.0 The mode of the control pin. SET or RESET.

When you want to control a RS-485 device you need an additional pin to control the buffer direction. When the pin must be high during printing use SET. When it must be low during print use RESET.

Example
Config Print = P3.0 'this pin controls the buffer Config mode = SET 'during PRINT this pin goes high. Print "Hello"

6.66

CONFIG SCL Action

Overrides the SCL pin assignment from the Option Settings
58

Syntax
CONFIG SCL = pin

Remarks
Pin The port pin to which the I2C-SCL line is connected.

When you use different pins in different projects, you can use this statement to override the Options Compiler setting for the SCL pin. This way you will remember which pin you used because it is in your code and you do not have to change the settings from the options. This statement can not be used to change the pin dynamically during runtime.

See also
CONFIG SDA
128

, CONFIG I2CDELAY

120

Example
CONFIG SCL = P3.5 'P3.5 is the SCL line

6.67

CONFIG SDA Action

Overrides the SDA pin assignment from the Option Settings
58

Syntax
2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference CONFIG SDA = pin

129

Remarks
pin The port pin to which the I2C-SDA line is connected.

When you use different pins in different projects, you can use this statement to override the Options Compiler setting for the SDA pin. This way you will remember which pin you used because it is in your code and you do not have to change the settings from the options.

See also
CONFIG SCL
128

, CONFIG I2CDELAY

120

Example
CONFIG SDA = P3.7 'P3.7 is the SDA line

6.68

CONFIG SERVOS Action

Configures the number of servos and their pins.

Syntax
Config SERVOS = number , SERVO1 = P1.1 , SERVO2 = P1.2 , SERVO3 = P1.4 , SERVO4 = P1.5 , RELOAD = value

Remarks
number The number of servos you want to use. When you specify 2, you must also add the SERVO1 and SERVO2 parameters. servo1 servo2 servo3 servo4 RELOAD The pin that is attached to servo 1. The pin that is attached to servo 2. The pin that is attached to servo 3. The pin that is attached to servo 4. The reload value in uS. Default 100 uS

The CONFIG SERVOS compiler directive will include an interrupt that will execute every 100 uS. The TIMER0 interrupt is enabled and the TIMER0 is started. The number of bytes used by the use of SERVO's is 1 + number of servos. When you use 2 servo's , it will take 3 bytes of internal memory. TIMER0 can not be used by your program anymore. To change the pulse duration you assign the special reserved variables the number of 100 uS steps: SERVO1 = 8 '800 uS pulse SERVO2 = 12 '1200 uS duration

2013 MCS Electronics

130

BASCOM-8051 After 20 mS the pulses will be sent again to the port pins. The maximum number of servo's is 14. The example shows how to set it up for 4 servo's only. When you specify RELOAD = 50 , 50 uS steps will be used! When you have a lot of servo's the RELOAD must be higher than when you have less servos. When you have a reload of 10 uS for example it will be impossible for the 8051 to handle more than 1 servo without losing time. For 2 servo's 20 or 25 should be used for best results.

6.69

CONFIG SPI Action

Configures the SPI related statements.

Syntax
CONFIG SPI = SOFT, DIN = PIN, DOUT = PIN , CS = PIN, CLK = PIN ,DATA ORDER = DO, NOCS = CONFIG SPI = ON CONFIG SPI = OFF CONFIG SPI = HARD, INTERRUPT = ON|OFF, DATA ORDER = LSB|MSB, MASTER=YES|NO,POLARITY=HIGH|LOW,PHASE=0|1,CLOCKRATE=4|16|64|128

Remarks
When you use the software SPI mode you must specify the following information: DIN DOUT CS CLK NOCS Data input. Pin is the pin number to use such as p1.0 Data output. Pin is the pin number to use such as p1.1 Chip select. Pin is the pin number to use such as p1.2 Clock. Pin is the pin number to use such as p1.3 Option without parameter. Use it to disable the resetting and setting of the CS pin.

DATA ORDER Use MSB or LSB. With MSB, MS bit will be sent first. LSB option will send the LS bit first. SPIOUTEDGE Falling or Rising. Falling is the default. The edge specifies if the the data will be clocked with a low to high or a high to low edge. When the NOCS option is used you must reset and set the CS pin yourself. The option is intended when you want to do large transfers between the micro and the SPI device. With the little internal memory you can do that in steps but of course you don't want the CS pin to change after each use of the SPIIN or SPIOUT routine. When you want to use the hardware SPI that is available in the 89S8252, you must specify the following information: INTERRUPT ON or OFF to enable or disable that the SPI interrupt is set. DATA ORDER LSB or MSB. Determines which bit is sent first. MASTER Yes or No. Set it to Yes for usage with the BASCOM SPI routines.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference POLARITY PHASE CLOCKRATE ON OFF

131

High or Low. See the Atmel datasheet 0 or 1. 4, 16, 64 or 128. This is a division that determines the clock rate. The oscillator clock is divided by the number you specify. You can turn on/enable SPI by using this option. It sets the enable bit. You an turn off the SPI by using this option. It resets the enable bit.

See also
SPIIN
224

SPIOUT

225

Example
Config SPI = SOFT, DIN = P1.0 , DOUT = P1.1, CS = P1.2, CLK = P1.3 SPIINIT init pins SPIOUT var , 1 'send 1 byte

6.70

CONFIG TIMER0, TIMER1 Action

Configure TIMER0 or TIMER1.

Syntax
CONFIG TIMERx = COUNTER/TIMER , GATE=INTERNAL/EXTERNAL , MODE=0/3

Remarks
TIMERx TIMER0 or TIMER1. COUNTER will configure TIMERx as a COUNTER and TIMER will configure TIMERx as a TIMER. A TIMER has built in clock input and a COUNTER has external clock input. GATE MODE INTERNAL or EXTERNAL. Specify EXTERNAL to enable gate control with the INT input. Time/counter mode 0-3. See Hardware for more details.

So CONFIG TIMER0 = COUNTER, GATE = INTERNAL, MODE=2 will configure TIMER0 as a COUNTER with no external gate control , in mode 2 (auto reload) When the timer/counter is configured the timer/counter is stopped so you must start it afterwards with the START TIMERx statement. See the additional statements for other microprocessors that use the CONFIG statement.

Example
CONFIG TIMER0=COUNTER, MODE=1, GATE=INTERNAL

2013 MCS Electronics

132

BASCOM-8051 COUNTER0 = 0 START COUNTER0 DELAY PRINT COUNTER0 END 'reset counter 0 'enable the counter to run 'wait a while 'print it

6.71

CONFIG WATCHDOG Action

Configures the watchdog timer from the AT89C8252

Syntax
CONFIG WATCHDOG = time

Remarks
Time The interval constant in mS the watchdog timer will count to. Possible settings: 16 , 32, 64 , 128 , 256 , 512 , 1024 and 2048. When the WD is started, a reset will occur after the specified number of mS. With 2048, a reset will occur after 2 seconds, so you need to reset the WD in your programs periodically.

See also
START WATCHDOG
292

, STOP WATCHDOG

292

, RESET WATCHDOG

292

Example
'----------------------------------------------------' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics ' WATCHD.BAS demonstrates the AT89S8252 watchdog timer ' select 89s8252.dat !!! '----------------------------------------------------Config Watchdog = 2048 'reset after 2048 mSec Start Watchdog 'start the watchdog timer Dim I As Word For I = 1 To 10000 Print I 'print value ' Reset Watchdog 'you will notice that the for next doesnt finish because of the reset 'when you unmark the RESET WATCHDOG statement it will finish because the 'wd-timer is reset before it reaches 2048 msec Next End

6.72

COUNTER Action
Set or retrieve the COUNTER0 or COUNTER1 variable. For 8052 TIMER2 compatible chips, COUNTER2 can be used too.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

133

Syntax
COUNTERX = var var = COUNTERX

Remarks
Var counterX A byte, Integer/Word variable or constant that is assigned to the counter. COUNTER0 , COUNTER1 or COUNTER2.

Use counterX = 0 to reset the counter. The counter can count from 0 to 255 in mode 2 (8-bit auto reload). And to 65535 in mode 1(16-bit). In mode 0 the counter can count to 8192. The MSB and 5 bits of the LSB are used in that case. When you assign a constant to a TIMER/COUNTER in mode 0, the bits will be placed in the right place : COUNTER0 = &B1_1111_1111_1111_1111 '13 bits Will be translated for mode 0 into 1111_1111_0001_1111 The counterx variables are intended to set/retrieve the TIMER/COUNTER registers from BASCOM. COUNTER0 = TL0 and TH0. So the COUNTERx reserved variable is a 16 bit variable. To set TLx or THx, you can use : TL0 = 5 for example. Note that the COUNTERx variable operates on both the TIMERS and COUNTER because the TIMERS and COUNTERS are the same thing except for the mode they are working in. To load a reload value, use the LOAD 184 statement. After access to the counter, the timer/counter is stopped. So when it was running, start it with the statement START COUNTERx

Example
'-------------------------------------------------------------' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics '-------------------------------------------------------------' file: COUNTER.BAS ' demo: COUNTER '-------------------------------------------------------------' Connect the timer input P3.4 to a frequency generator ' *TIMER/COUNTER 1 is used for RS-232 baud rate generator '-------------------------------------------------------------Dim A As Byte , C As Integer Config Timer0 = Counter , Gate = Internal , Mode = 1 'Timer0 = counter : timer0 operates as a counter 'Gate = Internal : no external gate control 'Mode = 1 : 16-bit counter Counter0 = 0 Start Counter0 Do A = Inkey 'clear counter 'enable the counter to count 'set up a loop 'check for input

2013 MCS Electronics

134

BASCOM-8051 C = Counter0 Print C Start Counter0 COUNTER Loop Until A = 27 End 'get counter value 'print it 're-start it because it was stopped by accessing the 'until escape is pressed

For the next example the ASM code is shown: COUNTER0 = 1000 Generated code : Clr TCON.4 Mov tl0,#232 Mov th0,#3

6.73

CPEEK Action
Returns a byte stored in code memory.

Syntax
var = CPEEK( address )

Remarks
var address Numeric variable that is assigned with the content of the program memory at address Numeric variable or constant with the address location

There is no CPOKE statement because you cannot write into program memory.

See also
PEEK
202

, POKE

202

, INP

173

, OUT

200

Example
'----------------------------------------------------' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics ' PEEK.BAS ' demonstrates PEEk, POKE, CPEEK, INP and OUT ' '----------------------------------------------------Dim I As Integer , B1 As Byte 'dump internal memory For I = 0 To 127 'for a 8052 225 could be used ' Break B1 = Peek(i) 'get byte from internal

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

135

memory Printhex B1 ; " "; 'Poke I , 1 'write a value into memory Next Print 'new line 'be careful when writing into internal memory !! 'now dump a part ofthe code-memory(program) For I = 0 To 255 B1 = Cpeek(i) 'get byte from internal memory Printhex B1 ; " "; Next 'note that you can not write into codememory!! Out &H8000 , 1 8000 B1 = INP(&H8000) Print B1 End 'write 1 into XRAM at address 'return value from XRAM

6.74

CURSOR Action
Set the LCD cursor state.

Syntax
CURSOR ON / OFF BLINK / NOBLINK

Remarks
You can use both the ON or OFF and BLINK or NOBLINK parameters. At power up the cursor state is ON and NOBLINK. For Graphic LCD 121 displays the state is ON BLINK

See also
DISPLAY
143

Example
Dim a as byte A = 255 LCD a Cursor Off Wait 1 Cursor Blink End 'hide cursor 'wait 1 second 'blink cursor

2013 MCS Electronics

136

BASCOM-8051

6.75

DATA Action
Specifies values to be read by subsequent READ statements.

Syntax
DATA var [, varn]

Remarks
Var Numeric or string constant.

To specify a character that cannot be written in the editor such as " you can use $34. The number is the ASCII value of the string. A null will be added so it will be a string of one character! When you want to store the string data without the ending null you can use the $NONULL directive as shown below: DATA "abcd" 'stored with and ending 0 $NONULL = -1 'from now on store the data without the extra 0 DATA "abcd" , "edgh" $NONULL = 0 'and go back to the normal default operation Version 2.09 supports expressions. You must use either expressions or normal constant data on the DATA lines. You may not mix them. DATA INTEGER(15 * constval + x) Where constval is a declare constant (CONST) and x is a CONST too. The INTEGER() funtion must be used to indicate that the resulting constant is of the integer type. Use WORD(), INTEGER(), LONG() or SINGLE() to specify the resulting constant.

Difference with QB
Integer and Word constants must end with the % -sign. Long constants must end with the &-sign. Single constants must end with the !-sign.

See also
READ
208

, RESTORE

212

Example
Dim A As Byte , I As Byte , L As Long , S As Xram String * 15 Restore Dta1 'point to data For A = 1 To 3 Read I : Print I 'read data and print it Next Restore Dta2 Read I : Print I Read I : Print I 'point to data ' integer data

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference Restore Dta3 Read L : Print L Restore Dta4 Read S : Print S END DTA1: Data 5 , 10 , 100 DTA2: Data -1% , 1000% 'Integer and Word constants must end with the %-sign. ' (Integer : <0 or >255) DTA3: Data 1235678& 'long constants must end with the &-sign DTA4: Data "Hello world" , $34 REM You can also mix different constant types on one line Data "TEST" , 5 , 1000% , -1& , 1.1!

137

' long data ' string data

6.76

DEBOUNCE Action
Debounces a port pin connected to a switch.

Syntax
DEBOUNCE Px.y , state , label [ , SUB]

Remarks
Px.y State Label SUB A port pin like P1.0 , to examine. 0 for jumping when Px.y is low , 1 for jumping when Px.y is high The label to GOTO when the specified state is detected The label to GOSUB when the specified state is detected

When you specify the optional parameter SUB, a GOSUB to label is performed instead of a GOTO. The DEBOUNCE statements wait for a port pin to get high(1) or low(0). When it does it will wait 25 mS and checks again (eliminating bounce of a switch) When the condition is still true and there was no branch before, it branches to the label. When DEBOUNCE is executed again, the state of the switch must have gone back in the original position before it can perform another branch. Each DEBOUNCE statement which uses a different port uses 1 BIT of the internal memory to hold it's state. What also should be mentioned is that P2.2-P2.7 and P3 have internal pull up resistors. This can affect the debounce statement. With these port pins, debounce is

2013 MCS Electronics

138

BASCOM-8051 best to be used as: Debounce P1.1, 0, Pr [, sub ] , as it will not require an external pull up resistor.

See also
CONFIG DEBOUNCE
120

Example
'----------------------------------------------------' DEBOUN.BAS ' Demonstrates DEBOUNCE '----------------------------------------------------Config Debounce = 30 'when the config statement is not used a default of 25mS will be used 'Debounce P1.1 , 1 , Pr 'try this for branching when high(1) Debounce P1.0 , 0 , Pr , Sub Debounce P1.0 , 0 , Pr , Sub ' ^----- label to branch to ' ^---------- Branch when P1.0 goes low(0) ' ^---------------- Examine P1.0 'When P1.0 goes low jump to subroutine Pr 'P1.0 must go high again before it jumps again 'to the label Pr when P1.0 is low Debounce P1.0 , 1 Debounce P1.0 , 1 , Pr without gosub End Pr: Print "P1.0 was/is low" Return 'no branch 'will result in a return

6.77

DECR Action
Decrements a variable by one.

Syntax
DECR var

Remarks
Var Variable to be decremented. var : Byte, Integer, Word, Long, Single. There are often situations where you want a number to be decreased by 1.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference The DECR statement is faster then var = var - 1.

139

See also
INCR
171

Example
'-------------------------------------------------------------' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics '-------------------------------------------------------------' file: DECR.BAS ' Demo: DECR '-------------------------------------------------------------Dim A As Byte A = 5 Decr A Print A End 'assign value to a 'decrease (by one) 'print it

6.78

DECLARE Action
Declares a subroutine.

Syntax
DECLARE SUB TEST[(var as type)]

Remarks
test Var Type Name of the procedure. Name of the variable(s). Maximum 10 allowed. Type of the variable(s). Bit, Byte,Word, Integer, Long or String.

You must declare each sub before writing or using the sub procedure.

See also
CALL
113

, SUB

229

Example
Dim A As Byte , B1 As Byte , C As Byte Declare Sub Test(a As Byte) A = 1 : B1 = 2 : C = 3 Print A ; B1 ; C

2013 MCS Electronics

140

BASCOM-8051

Call Test(b1) Print A ; B1 ; C End

Sub Test(a As Byte) Print A ; B1 ; C End Sub

6.79

DEF Action
Declares all variables that are not dimensioned of the DefXXX type.

Syntax
DEFBIT b DEFBYTE c DEFINT I DEFWORD x

Difference with QB
QB allows you to specify a range like DEFINT A - D. BASCOM doesn't support this.

Example
Defbit b : DefInt c 'default type for bit and integers Set b1 'set bit to 1 c = 10 'let c = 10

6.80

DEFLCDCHAR Action
Define a custom LCD character.

Syntax
DEFLCDCHAR char,r1,r2,r3,r4,r5,r6,r7,r8

Remarks
char r1-r8 Variable representing the character (0-7). The row values for the character.

char : Byte, Integer, Word, Long, Constant. r1-r8 : Constant. You can use the LCD designer to build the characters.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

141

It is important that after the DEFLCDCHAR statement(s), a CLS follows. The special characters can be printed with the Chr() function.

See also
Edit LCD designer
54

, LCD

178

Example
DefLCDchar 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 'define special character Cls 'select LCD DATA RAM LCD Chr(0) 'show the character End

6.81

DELAY Action
Delay program execution for a short time.

Syntax
DELAY

Remarks
Use DELAY to wait for a short time. The delay time is 100 microseconds based on a system frequency of 12 MHz.

See also
WAIT
233

, WAITMS

234

Example
P1 = 5 DELAY 'write 5 to port 1 'wait for hardware to be ready

6.82

DIM Action
Dimension a variable.

Syntax
DIM var AS [XRAM/IRAM] type

Remarks
Var Any valid variable name such as b1, i or longname. var can also be an array : ar(10) for example.

2013 MCS Electronics

142

BASCOM-8051 Type XRAM IRAM Bit/Boolean, Byte, Word, Integer, Long, Single or String Specify XRAM to store variable in external memory Specify IRAM to store variable in internal memory (default)

A string variable needs an additional parameter that specifies the length of the string: Dim s As XRAM String * 10 In this case, the string can have a length of 10 characters. Note that BITS can only be stored in internal memory.

Difference with QB
In QB you don't need to dimension each variable before you use it. In BASCOM you must dimension each variable before you use it. Also the XRAM/IRAM options are not available in QB.

See Also
CONST
116

, ERASE

147

Example
'-------------------------------------------------------------' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics '-------------------------------------------------------------' file: DIM.BAS ' demo: DIM '-------------------------------------------------------------Dim B1 As Bit 'bit can be 0 or 1 Dim A As Byte 'byte range from 0-255 Dim C As Integer 'integer range from -32767 +32768 Dim L As Long Dim S As Single 'Assign bits B1 = 1 'or Set B1 'use set 'Assign bytes A = 12 A = A + 1 'Assign integer C = -12 C = C + 100 Print C 'Assign long L = 12345678 Print L 'Assign single

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference S = 1234.567 Print S End

143

6.83

DISABLE Action
Disable specified interrupt.

Syntax
DISABLE interrupt

Remarks
Interrupt INT0, INT1, SERIAL, TIMER0, TIMER1 or TIMER2. For other chips : INT2, INT3, INT4, INT5, INT6, INT7 , INT8, CAN By default all interrupts are disabled. To disable all interrupts specify INTERRUPTS. To enable the enabling and disabling of individual interrupts use ENABLE INTERRUPTS. Depending on the chip used, there can be more interrupts. Look at microprocessor support 288 for more details.

See also
ENABLE
145

Example
Enable Interrupts interrupts Enable Timer0 Disable Serial interrupt. Disable Interrupts 'enable the setting of 'enable TIMER0 'disables the serial 'disable all interrupts

6.84

DISPLAY Action
Turn LCD display on or off.

Syntax
DISPLAY ON / OFF

Remarks
The display is turned on at power up.

2013 MCS Electronics

144

BASCOM-8051

See also
CURSOR
135

, LCD

178

Example
Dim a as byte a = 255 LCD a DISPLAY OFF Wait 1 DISPLAY ON End

6.85

DO Action
Repeat a block of statements until condition is true.

Syntax
DO statements LOOP [ UNTIL expression ]

Remarks
You can exit a DO..LOOP with the EXIT DO
148

statement.

See also
EXIT
148

, WHILE

236

WEND

236

, FOR

148

, NEXT

196

Example
Dim A As Byte Do A = A + 1 Print A Loop Until A = 10 Print A 'start the loop 'increment A 'print it 'Repeat loop until A = 10 'A is still 10 here

6.86

ELSE Action
Executed if the IF-THEN expression is false.

Syntax
ELSE

Remarks
2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference You don't have to use the ELSE statement in an IF THEN .. END IF structure. You can use the ELSEIF statement to test for another condition. IF a = 1 THEN ... ELSEIF a = 2 THEN .. ELSEIF b1 > a THEN ... ELSE ... END IF

145

See also
IF
169

, END IF

146

SELECT CASE

216

Example
Dim A As Byte A = 10 If A > 10 Then Print "A >10" Else Print "A not greater than 10" END IF 'let a = 10 'make a decision 'this will not be printed 'alternative 'this will be printed

6.87

ENABLE Action
Enable specified interrupt.

Syntax
ENABLE interrupt

Remarks
Interrupt INT0, INT1, SERIAL, TIMER0, TIMER1 or TIMER2

For other chips also : INT2, INT3, INT4, INT5, INT6, INT7, INT8 , CAN By default all interrupts are disabled. To enable the enabling and disabling of interrupts use ENABLE INTERRUPTS. Other microprocessors can have more interrupts than the 8051/8052. Look at specific microprocessor support 288 for more details.

See also
DISABLE
143

2013 MCS Electronics

146

BASCOM-8051

Example
ENABLE INTERRUPTS ENABLE TIMER1 'allow interrupts to be set 'enables the TIMER1 interrupt

6.88

END Action
Terminate program execution.

Syntax
END

Remarks
STOP can also be used to terminate a program. When an END or STOP statement is encountered, a never ending loop is generated.

See also
STOP
226

Example
PRINT " Hello" 'print this END 'end program execution

6.89

END IF Action
End an IF .. THEN structure.

Syntax
END IF

Remarks
You must always end an IF .. THEN structure with an END IF statement. You can nest IF ..THEN statements. The use of ELSE is optional. The editor converts ENDIF to End If when the reformat option is switched on.

See also
IF THEN
169

, ELSE

144

Example

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference Dim Nmb As Byte Again: Input " Number " , Nmb If Nmb = 10 Then Print " Number is 10" Else If Nmb > 10 Then Print " Number > 10" Else Print " Number < 10" End If End If End

147

'label 'ask for number 'compare 'yes 'no 'is it greater 'yes 'no 'print this 'end structure 'end structure 'end program

6.90

ERASE Action
Erases a variable so memory will be released.

Syntax
ERASE var

Remarks
var The name of the variable to erase. The variable must be dimensioned before you can erase it. When you need temporary variables you can erase them after you used them. This way your program uses less memory. You can only ERASE the last dimensioned variables. So when you DIM 2 variables for local purposes, you must ERASE these variables. The order in which you ERASE them doesn't matter. For example : Dim a1 as byte , a2 as byte , a3 as byte , a4 as byte 'use the vars ERASE a3 : ERASE a4 'erase the last 2 vars because they were temp vars Dim a5 as Byte 'Dim new var Now you can't erase the vars a1 and a2 anymore ! Note that ERASED variables don't show up in the report file nor in the simulator.

Example
Dim A As Byte A = 255 Print A Erase A 'DIM variable 'assign value 'PRINT variable 'ERASE

2013 MCS Electronics

148

BASCOM-8051 Dim A As Integer 'DIM again but now as INT Print A 'PRINT again REM Note that A uses the same space a the previous ERASED var A so REM it still holds the value of the previous assigned variable

6.91

EXIT Action
Exit a FOR..NEXT, DO..LOOP , WHILE ..WEND or SUB..END SUB.

Syntax
EXIT [FOR] [DO] [WHILE] [SUB]

Remarks
With the EXIT ... statement you can exit a structure at any time.

See also
FOR
148

, DO

144

, WHILE

236

Example
Dim A As Byte , B1 As Byte A = 2 : B1 = 1 If A >= B1 Then Do A = A + 1 If A = 100 Then Exit Do End If Loop End If 'DIM variable 'some silly code 'begin a DO..LOOP 'inc a 'test for a = 100 'exit the DO..LOOP 'end the IF..THEN 'end the DO 'end the IF..THEN

6.92

FOR Action
Execute a block of statements a number of times.

Syntax
FOR var = start TO/DOWNTO end [STEP value]

Remarks
Var Start End Value The variable counter to use The starting value of the variable var The ending value of the variable var The value var is increased/decreased with each time NEXT is encountered.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference var : start: end : step : Byte, Integer, Word, Long, Single. Byte, Integer, Word, Long, Single, Constant. Byte, Integer, Word, Long, Single, Constant. Byte, Integer, Word, Long, Single, Constant.

149

For incremental loops you must use TO. For decremental loops you must use DOWNTO. You may use TO for a decremental loop but in that case you must use a negative STEP : For a = 10 To 1 STEP -1 You must end a FOR structure with the NEXT statement. The use of STEP is optional. By default a value of 1 is used.

See also
NEXT
196

, EXIT FOR

148

Example
Dim Y As Byte , A As Byte,x as byte y = 10 'make y 10 For A = 1 To 10 For X = Y To 1 Print X ; A Next Next

'do this 10 times 'this one also 'print the values 'next x (count down) 'next a (count up)

Dim S As Single For S = 1 To 2 Step 0.1 Print S Next End

6.93

FOURTHLINE Action
Reset LCD cursor to the fourth line.

Syntax
FOURTHLINE

Remarks
Only valid for LCD displays with 4 lines.

See also
HOME
166

, UPPERLINE

232

, LOWERLINE

188

, THIRDLINE

230

, LOCATE

185

2013 MCS Electronics

150

BASCOM-8051

Example
Dim a as byte a = 255 LCD a Fourthline LCD a Upperline END

6.94

FUSING Action
Formats a floating point value.

Syntax
var = Fusing( source, mask)

Remarks
Var Source Mask The string that is assigned with the result. A variable of the type single that must be formatted. The formatting mask . ###.## The # sign is used to indicate the number of digits before and after the decimal point. Normal rounding is used. When you don't need rouding the result, use the & sign instead of the # sign after the point. When you want leading zero's use the 0 character before the point.

See also
STR
228

Example
Dim S As Single , Targ As String * 16 'The FUSING() function formats a single into a string in order to 'represent it better without all the digits after the point

'assign single S = 99.4999 Targ = Fusing(s , ##.#) Print Targ 'with the # mask, you can provide the number of digits before and after 'the point

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference 'the result should be 99.5

151

'with a 0 before the point, you can indicate how many digits you want to 'have filled with zeros Targ = Fusing(s , 000.#) 'the result should be 099.5 'When you dont want that the result is rounded, you can use the & indicator Targ = Fusing(s , 000.&&) 'result should be 099.49 'note that if the number of digits you provide is not enough to store the 'result result is extended automaticly 'Also note that the - sign will use one digit of the mask too S = -99.12 Targ = Fusing(s , 00.&&) 'result is -99.12 End

6.95

GET Action
Retrieves a byte from the software UART.

Syntax
GET #channel , var

Remarks
Channel Var Positive numeric constant that refers to the opened channel. A variable that receives the value from the software UART.

Note that the channel must be opened with the OPEN statement. Also, note that the CLOSE statement, must be the last in your program. Please see comment on OPEN 198 statement An optional TIMEOUT can be specified so that the routine will return when no character is received.

See also
PUT
207

, $TIMEOUT

107

Example
2013 MCS Electronics

152

BASCOM-8051 Dim S As String * 12 , I As Byte , A As Byte , Dum As Byte Open "com3.1:9600" For Output As #1 'p3.1 is normally used for tx so testing is easy Open "com3.0:9600" For Input As #2 'p3.0 is normally used for RX so testing is easy

S = "test this" 'assign string Dum = Len(s) 'get length of string For I = 1 To Dum 'for all characters from left to right A = Mid(s , I , 1) 'get character Put #1 , A 'write it to comport Next Do Get #2 , A 'get character from comport Put #1 , A 'write it back Print A 'use normal channel Loop Printbin #1, a Inputbin #2, a Close #1 Close #2 End 'Printbin is also supported 'Inputbin is also supported ' finally close device

'To use the TIMEOUT option include (without the remarks): '$TIMEOUT ' Get #2 , A TIMEOUT = 10000 'get character from comport

6.96

GETAD Action
Retrieves the analog value from channel 0-7. Channel ranges from 0-11 on a 80517 or 80537.

Syntax
var = GETAD(channel, range)

Remarks
Var Channel The variable that is assigned with the A/D value The channel to measure

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference Range The internal range selection. 0 = 0-5 Volt 192 = 0 - 3.75 Volt 128 = 0 - 2.5 Volt 64 = 0 - 1.25 Volt 12 = 3.75 - 5 Volt 200 = 2.5 - 3.75 Volt 132 = 1.25 - 2.5 Volt

153

The GETAD() function is only intended for the 80515, 80535,80517, 80535 and 80552. For the 89Cc051 use GETAD2051(). It is a microprocessor depended support 288 feature.

See also
GETAD2051
153

Example
Dim b1 as Byte, Channel as byte,ref as byte channel=0 'input at P6.0 ref=0 'range from 0 to 5 Volt b1=getad(channel,ref) 'place A/D into b1

6.97

GETAD2051 Action
Retrieves the analog value from a 89C2051 or 89C4051.

Syntax
var = GETAD2051()

Remarks
var The variable that is assigned with the A/D value

The GETAD2051() function is only intended for the 89C2051 and 89C4051. It uses the analog comparator of the chip. Connect the hardware as following :

2013 MCS Electronics

154

BASCOM-8051

See also
GETAD
152

Example
$regfile = "89c2051.dat" Dim A As Byte Do A = Getad2051() A = Lookup(a , Dta) Print A Loop End 'this table converts the value into a packed BCD value 'this value can be used to diaplay the value on 2 7-segment displays Dta: Data 0 Data 1 Data 1 ' 0 0.000 ' 1 0.047 ' 2 0.093

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference Data 2 Data 2 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 Data 4 Data 4 Data 5 Data 5 Data 6 Data 6 Data 6 Data 7 Data 7 Data 8 Data 8 Data 8 Data 9 Data 9 Data &H10 Data &H10 Data &H10 Data &H11 Data &H11 Data &H11 Data &H12 Data &H12 Data &H12 Data &H13 Data &H13 Data &H13 Data &H14 Data &H14 Data &H14 Data &H15 Data &H15 Data &H15 Data &H16 Data &H16 Data &H16 Data &H17 Data &H17 Data &H17 Data &H18 ' 3 0.138 ' 4 0.184 ' 5 0.229 ' 6 0.273 ' 7 0.317 ' 8 0.361 ' 9 0.404 ' 10 0.447 ' 11 0.489 ' 12 0.531 ' 13 0.573 ' 14 0.614 ' 15 0.655 ' 16 0.696 ' 17 0.736 ' 18 0.776 ' 19 0.815 ' 20 0.854 ' 21 0.893 ' 22 0.931 ' 23 0.969 ' 24 1.006 ' 25 1.044 ' 26 1.080 ' 27 1.117 ' 28 1.153 ' 29 1.189 ' 30 1.224 ' 31 1.260 ' 32 1.295 ' 33 1.329 ' 34 1.363 ' 35 1.397 ' 36 1.431 ' 37 1.464 ' 38 1.497 ' 39 1.530 ' 40 1.562 ' 41 1.594 ' 42 1.626 ' 43 1.657 ' 44 1.688 ' 45 1.719 ' 46 1.750

155

2013 MCS Electronics

156

BASCOM-8051 Data &H18 Data &H18 Data &H19 Data &H19 Data &H19 Data &H19 Data &H20 Data &H20 Data &H20 Data &H21 Data &H21 Data &H21 Data &H21 Data &H22 Data &H22 Data &H22 Data &H22 Data &H23 Data &H23 Data &H23 Data &H23 Data &H24 Data &H24 Data &H24 Data &H24 Data &H25 Data &H25 Data &H25 Data &H25 Data &H26 Data &H26 Data &H26 Data &H50 Data &H49 Data &H49 Data &H48 Data &H48 Data &H47 Data &H47 Data &H47 Data &H46 Data &H46 Data &H45 ' 47 1.780 ' 48 1.810 ' 49 1.840 ' 50 1.869 ' 51 1.898 ' 52 1.927 ' 53 1.956 ' 54 1.984 ' 55 2.012 ' 56 2.040 ' 57 2.068 ' 58 2.095 ' 59 2.122 ' 60 2.149 ' 61 2.176 ' 62 2.202 ' 63 2.228 ' 64 2.254 ' 65 2.279 ' 66 2.305 ' 67 2.330 ' 68 2.355 ' 69 2.379 ' 70 2.404 ' 71 2.428 ' 72 2.452 ' 73 2.476 ' 74 2.499 ' 75 2.523 ' 76 2.546 ' 77 2.569 ' 78 2.591 ' 79 5.000 ' 80 4.953 ' 81 4.907 ' 82 4.862 ' 83 4.816 ' 84 4.771 ' 85 4.727 ' 86 4.683 ' 87 4.639 ' 88 4.596 ' 89 4.553

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference Data &H45 Data &H44 Data &H44 Data &H44 Data &H43 Data &H43 Data &H42 Data &H42 Data &H42 Data &H41 Data &H41 Data &H40 Data &H40 Data &H40 Data &H39 Data &H39 Data &H39 Data &H38 Data &H38 Data &H38 Data &H37 Data &H37 Data &H37 Data &H36 Data &H36 Data &H36 Data &H35 Data &H35 Data &H35 Data &H34 Data &H34 Data &H34 Data &H33 Data &H33 Data &H33 Data &H32 Data &H32 Data &H32 Data &H31 Data &H31 Data &H31 Data &H31 Data &H30 Data &H30 ' 90 4.511 ' 91 4.469 ' 92 4.427 ' 93 4.386 ' 94 4.345 ' 95 4.304 ' 96 4.264 ' 97 4.224 ' 98 4.185 ' 99 4.146 ' 100 4.107 ' 101 4.069 ' 102 4.031 ' 103 3.994 ' 104 3.956 ' 105 3.920 ' 106 3.883 ' 107 3.847 ' 108 3.811 ' 109 3.776 ' 110 3.740 ' 111 3.705 ' 112 3.671 ' 113 3.637 ' 114 3.603 ' 115 3.569 ' 116 3.536 ' 117 3.503 ' 118 3.470 ' 119 3.438 ' 120 3.406 ' 121 3.374 ' 122 3.343 ' 123 3.312 ' 124 3.281 ' 125 3.250 ' 126 3.220 ' 127 3.190 ' 128 3.160 ' 129 3.131 ' 130 3.102 ' 131 3.073 ' 132 3.044 ' 133 3.016

157

2013 MCS Electronics

158

BASCOM-8051 Data &H30 Data &H29 Data &H29 Data &H29 Data &H29 Data &H28 Data &H28 Data &H28 Data &H28 Data &H27 Data &H27 Data &H27 Data &H27 Data &H26 Data &H26 Data &H26 Data &H26 Data &H25 Data &H25 Data &H25 Data &H25 Data &H24 Data &H24 Data &H24 ' 134 2.988 ' 135 2.960 ' 136 2.932 ' 137 2.905 ' 138 2.878 ' 139 2.851 ' 140 2.824 ' 141 2.798 ' 142 2.772 ' 143 2.746 ' 144 2.721 ' 145 2.695 ' 146 2.670 ' 147 2.645 ' 148 2.621 ' 149 2.596 ' 150 2.572 ' 151 2.548 ' 152 2.524 ' 153 2.501 ' 154 2.477 ' 155 2.454 ' 156 2.431 ' 157 2.409

6.98

GETRC Action
Retrieves the value of a resistor or a capacitor.

Syntax
var = GETRC( pin )

Remarks
var pin The variable that receives the value. The port pin the R/C is connect to.

GETRC needs a resistor and capacitor in order to work. The capacitor is discharged and the charging time will vary depending on the user resistor/capacitor value.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

159

Uses
This function uses TIMER0.

See also
NONE

Example
'---------------------------------------------------------------------' GETRC.BAS ' Retrieve resistor value ' Connect 10KOhm variable resistor from +5V to P1.7 for this example ' Connect 10nF capacitor from P1.7 to ground ' The GETRC(pin) function measures the time needed to discharge the capacitor '---------------------------------------------------------------------Config Timer0 = Timer , Gate = Internal , Mode = 1 'the GETRC() functions needs timer 0 Config Getrc = 10 '10mS wait for charging the capacitor. This is the default so for 10 the CONFIG is not needed $baud = 9600 'just my settings $crystal = 11059200 Dim W As Word 'allocate space for variable Do W = Getrc(p1.7) Print W Wait 1 Loop 'forever 'get RC value 'print it 'wait a moment

'return values for cap=10nF .The resistor values where measured with a DVM ' 250 for 10K9

2013 MCS Electronics

160

BASCOM-8051 ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 198 182 166 154 138 122 106 86 54 22 18 10 6 for for for for for for for for for for for for for 9K02 8K04 7K 6K02 5K04 4K04 3K06 2K16 1K00 198 150 104 1

ohm ohm ohm ohm (minimum)

'As you can see there is a reasonable linearity 'So you can do some math to get the resistor value 'But the function is intended to serve as a rough indication for resistor values 'You can also change the capacitor to get larger values. 'With 10nF, the return value fits into a byte

6.99

GETRC5 Action
Retrieves a RC5 infrared code and sub address.

Syntax
GETRC5(address , command)

Remarks
Address Command The RC5 sub address received. The RC5 command received.

Use a Siemens infrared receiver SFH506-36 and connect it to port pin 3.2 to use this command. This statement works together with the INT0 interrupt. See the example below on how to use it. In version 2.09 the command returns the toggle bit in bit position 5 of the address. You can clear it like : address = address AND &B0001_1111 The toggle bit will toggle after each key press of the remote control.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

161

See Also
NONE

Example
'--------------------------------------------------------------------------' RC5.BAS (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics ' connect SFH506-36 IR-receiver to PORT 3.2 (INT0) ' choose the correct port from the Compiler I2C TAB. Int0 should have P3.2 pin ' On other chips it may be another pin! '--------------------------------------------------------------------------Dim New As Bit Dim Command As Byte , Subaddress As Byte Reset Tcon.0 'triggered by rising edge On Int0 Receiverc5 Enable Int0 Enable Interrupts Do If New = 1 Then 'received new code Disable Int0 Print Command ; " " ; Subaddress New = 0 new bit Enable Int0 End If

'reset

2013 MCS Electronics

162

BASCOM-8051 Loop

Receiverc5: 'interrupt routine 'the getrc5 routine uses 30 bytes ! of the stack for measuring 'the interval between the bits Getrc5(Subaddress,command) New = 1 'set flag Return

6.100 GOSUB Action

Branch to and execute subroutine.

Syntax
GOSUB label

Remarks
label The name of the label where to branch to.

With GOSUB, your program jumps to the specified label, and continues execution at that label. When it encounters a RETURN statement, program execution will continue after the GOSUB statement.

See also
GOTO
163

, CALL

113

, RETURN

213

Example
GOSUB Routine Print "Hello" END Routine: x=x+2 PRINT X RETURN 'branch to routine 'after being at 'routine' print this 'terminate program 'this is a subroutine 'perform some math 'print result 'return

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

163

6.101 GOTO Action

Jump to the specified label.

Syntax
GOTO label

Remarks
Labels can be up to 32 characters long. When you use duplicate labels, the compiler will give you a warning.

See also
GOSUB
162

Example
Dim A As Byte Start: colon A = A + 1 If A < 10 Then Goto Start End If Print " Ready" 'a label must end with a 'increment a 'is it less than 10? 'do it again 'close IF 'that is it

6.102 HEX Action

Returns a string representation of a hexadecimal number.

Syntax
var = HEX( x )

Remarks
Var X A string variable. A numeric variable such as Byte, Integer or Word.

See also
HEXVAL
164

, VAL

232

, STR

228

2013 MCS Electronics

164

BASCOM-8051

Example
Dim A As Byte , S As String * 10 A = 123 S = Hex(a) Print S End

6.103 HEXVAL Action

Convert string representing a hexadecimal number into a numeric variable.

Syntax
var = HEXVAL( x )

Remarks
var X The numeric variable that must be assigned. The hexadecimal string that must be converted.

var : Byte, Integer, Word, Long. x : String. The string that must be converted must have a length of 2 bytes ,4 bytes or 8 bytes, for bytes, integers/words and longs respectively.

Difference with QB
In QB you can use the VAL() function to convert hexadecimal strings. But since that would require an extra test for the leading &H signs, that are required in QB, a separate function was designed.

See also
HEX
163

, VAL

232

, STR

228

Example
Dim A As Integer , S As String * 15 S = "000A" A = Hexval(s) : Print A End '10

6.104 HIGH Action

Retrieves the most significant byte of a variable.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

165

Syntax
var = HIGH( s ) HIGH(word) = byte

high function gets the upper byte of a word high statement set the upper byte of a word

Remarks
Var S Word Byte The variable that is assigned with the MSB of var S. The source variable to get the MSB from. A word or integer variable that is assigned The value to set to the MSB of the Word/Integer variable

The HIGH() function returns the MSB of a variable while the HIGH() statement sets the MSB of a word variable.

See also
LOW
187

, LOWW

188

, HIGHW

165

Example
Dim I As Integer , Z As Byte I = &H1001 Z = High(I) ' is 16

6.105 HIGHW Action

Retrieves the two most significant bytes of a long.

Syntax
var = HIGHW( s )

Remarks
Var S The variable that is assigned with the two MSB of var S. It must be an Integer or Word The source variable to get the MSB from. Must be a long

See also
LOW
187

, HIGH

164

, LOWW

188

Example
Dim I As Long , Z As Word I = &H10011001

2013 MCS Electronics

166

BASCOM-8051 Z = HighW(I)

6.106 HOME Action

Place the cursor at the specified line at location 1.

Syntax
HOME UPPER | LOWER | THIRD | FOURTH

Remarks
If only HOME is used than, the cursor will be set to the upper line. You can also specify the first letter of the line like: HOME U

See also
CLS
115

, LOCATE

185

, LCD

178

Example
Lowerline LCD " Hello" Home Upper LCD " Upper"

6.107 I2CRECEIVE Action

Receives data from an I2C serial device.

Syntax
I2CRECEIVE slave, var I2CRECEIVE slave, var ,b2W, b2R

Remarks
slave Var b2W b2R A byte, Word/Integer variable or constant with the slave address from the I2C-device. A byte or integer/word variable that will receive the information from the I2C-device. The number of bytes to write. Be cautious not to specify too many bytes! The number of bytes to receive. Be cautious not to specify too many bytes!

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

167

In BASCOM LT you could specify DATA for var, but since arrays are supported now you can specify and array instead of DATA. This command works only with some additional hardware. See appendix D
251

See also
I2CSEND
167

Example
x=0 slave = &H40 I2CRECEIVE slave, x PRINT x 'reset variable 'slave address of a PCF 8574 I/O IC 'get the value 'print it

Dim buf(10) as String buf(1) = 1 : buf(2) = 2 I2CRECEIVE slave, buf(), 2, 1'send two bytes and receive one byte Print buf(1) 'print the received byte

6.108 I2CSEND Action

Send data to an I2C-device.

Syntax
I2CSEND slave, var I2CSEND slave, var , bytes

Remarks
slave var bytes The slave address off the I2C-device. A byte, integer/word or number that holds the value which will be sent to the I2C-device. The number of bytes to send.

This command works only with additional hardware. See appendix D

251

See also
I2CRECEIVE
166

Example
x=5 Dim ax(10) As Byte slave = &H40 'assign variable to 5 'slave address of a PCF 8574 I/O IC

2013 MCS Electronics

168

BASCOM-8051 bytes = 1 I2CSEND slave, x 'send 1 byte 'send the value or

For a = 1 to 10 ax(a) = a Next bytes = 10 I2CSEND slave,ax(),bytes END

'Fill dataspace

6.109 I2C Action

I2CSTART generates an I2C start condition. I2CSTOP generates an I2C stop condition. I2CRBYTE receives one byte from an I2C-device. I2CWBYTE sends one byte to an I2C-device.

Syntax
I2CSTART I2CSTOP I2CRBYTE var, 8|9 I2CWBYTE val

Remarks
var 8/9 val A variable that receives the value from the I2C-device. Specify 8 or ACK if there are more bytes to read. (ACK) Specify 9 or NACK if it is the last byte to read. (NACK) A variable or constant to write to the I2C-device.
251

This command works only with additional hardware. See appendix D These functions are provided as an addition to the I2CSEND functions.
167

.
166

and I2CRECEIVE

See also
I2CRECEIVE
166

, I2CSEND

167

Example
'----- Writing and reading a byte to an EEPROM 2404 ----------------Dim A As Byte Const Adresw = 174 'write of 2404 Const Adresr = 175 'read adres of 2404 I2cstart 'generate start I2cwbyte Adresw 'send slaveadres I2cwbyte 1 'send adres of EEPROM

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference I2cwbyte 3 I2cstop Waitms 10 the time that the chip needs to write the

169

'send a value 'generate stop 'wait 10 mS because that is data

'----------now read the value back into the var a ------------------I2cstart 'generate start I2cwbyte Adresw 'write slaveadres I2cwbyte 1 'write adres of EEPROM to read I2cstart 'generate repeated start I2cwbyte Adresr 'write slaveadres of EEPROM I2crbyte A , 9 'receive value into a. 9 means last byte to receive I2cstop 'generate stop Print A 'print received value End

6.110 IDLE Action

Put the processor into the idle mode.

Syntax
IDLE

Remarks
In the idle mode, the system clock is removed from the CPU but not from the interrupt logic, the serial port or the timers/counters. The idle mode is terminated either when an interrupt is received or upon system reset through the RESET pin.

See also
POWERDOWN
203

Example
IDLE

6.111 IF Action
Allows conditional execution or branching, based on the evaluation of a Boolean expression.

2013 MCS Electronics

170

BASCOM-8051

Syntax
IF expression THEN [ ELSEIF expression THEN ] [ ELSE ] END IF

Remarks
expression Any expression that evaluates to true or false. New is the ability to use the one line version of IF : IF expression THEN statement [ ELSE statement ] The use of [ELSE] is optional. Also new is the ability to test on bits : IF var.bit = 1 THEN In V 2.00 support for variable bit index is added: Dim Idx as Byte For IDX = 0 To 7 If P3.IDX = 1 Then Print "1" ; Else Print "0" ; End if Next A new feature in V2 is the ability to use multiple tests: If a > 10 AND A < 10 OR A = 15 Then NOP End if It does not work with strings but only numeric conditions. When you want to test on bytes you can also use the string representation: Dim X As Byte If X = "A" then ' normally you need to write : If X = 65 Then 'so these two lines do the same thing

See also
ELSE
144

, END IF

146

Example
Dim A As Integer A = 10 If A = 10 Then Print " This part is executed." Else Print " This will never be executed." 'test expression 'this will be printed 'this not

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference End If If A = 10 Then Print "New in BASCOM" If A = 10 Then Goto Label1 Else Print "A<>10"

171

Label1: Rem The following example shows enhanced use of IF THEN If A.15 = 1 Then 'test for bit Print "BIT 15 IS SET" End If REM the following example shows the 1 line use of IF THEN [ELSE] If A.15 = 0 Then Print "BIT 15 is cleared" Else Print "BIT 15 is set"

6.112 INCR Action

Increments a variable by one.

Syntax
INCR var

Remarks
Var Any numeric variable.

There are often situations where you want a number to be increased by 1. The INCR statement is faster then var = var + 1.

See also
DECR
138

Example
Dim A As Integer Do Incr A Print A Loop Until A > 10 than 10 'start loop 'increment a by 1 'print a 'repeat until a is greater

6.113 INKEY Action

Returns the ASCII value of the first character in the serial input buffer.

2013 MCS Electronics

172

BASCOM-8051

Syntax
var = INKEY() var = INKEY(#channel)

Remarks
Var Channel Byte, Integer, Word, Long or String variable. The channel number of device

If there is no character waiting, a zero will be returned. The INKEY routine can be used when you have a RS-232 interface on your uP. See the manual for a design of an RS-232 interface. The RS-232 interface can be connected to a comport of your computer. The INKEY() function only works with the hardware UART, not the software UART.

See also
WAITKEY
234

Example
Dim A As Byte Do A = Inkey() If A > 0 Then Print A the buffer End If Loop 'start loop 'look for character 'is variable > 0? 'yes , there was a character in 'so print it 'loop forever

Example
$regfile = "80517.dat" Open "COM2:" For Binary As #1 80537 Dim St As Byte St = Inkey(#1) If St > 0 Then Printbin #1 , St End If Close #1 'open serial channel 1 on

'get key from com2 'send to com 2

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

173

6.114 INP Action

Returns a byte read from a hardware port or external memory location.

Syntax
var = INP(address)

Remarks
var address Numeric variable that receives the value. The address where to read the value from.

The INP statement only works on systems with an uP that can address external memory.

See also
OUT
200

, PEEK

202

, POKE

202

Example
Dim a As Byte a = INP(&H8000) PRINT a END 'read value that is placed on databus(d0-d7) at 'hex address 8000

6.115 INPUT Action

Allows input from the keyboard during program execution.

Syntax
INPUT [" prompt" ] , var [ , varn ] [ NOECHO ] [ TIMEOUT = xx]

Remarks
Prompt Var,varn NOECHO TIMEOUT An optional string constant printed before the prompt character. A variable to accept the input value or a string. Disables input echoed back to the Comport. Optional delay time. When you specify the delay time, the routine will return when no input data is available after the specified time. No timer is used but a long is used to count down.

The INPUT routine can be used when you have a RS-232 interface on your uP. See the manual for a design of a RS-232 interface. The RS-232 interface can be connected to a serial communication port of your computer.

2013 MCS Electronics

174

BASCOM-8051 This way you can use a terminal emulator and the keyboard as an input device. You can also use the built in terminal emulator. A backspace will remove the last entered character.

Difference with QB
In QB you can specify &H with INPUT so QB will recognize that a hexadecimal string is used. BASCOM implements a new statement: INPUTHEX.

See also
INPUTHEX
176

, PRINT

203

, $TIMEOUT

107

Example
'-------------------------------------------------------------' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics '-------------------------------------------------------------' file: INPUT.BAS ' demo: INPUT, INPUTHEX '-------------------------------------------------------------'To use another baudrate and crystalfrequency use the 'metastatements $BAUD = and $CRYSTAL = $baud = 1200 'try 1200 baud for example $crystal = 12000000 '12 MHz '--------------------------------------------------------------' When you need that the program times out on waiting for a character ' you need to use the TIMEOUT option. ' When the charcter is not received within the specified time ERR will be set to 1 ' otherwise ERR will be 0. ' IMPORTANT : the TIMEOUT variable will use 4 bytes of internal memory '--------------------------------------------------------------Dim Dim Dim for V As Byte , B1 As Byte C As Integer , D As Byte S As String * 15 uP with XRAM support

'only

Input "Use this to ask a question " , V Input B1 out for no question Input "Enter integer " , C Print C

'leave

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

175

Inputhex "Enter hex number (4 bytes) " , C Print C Inputhex "Enter hex byte (2 bytes) " , D Print D Input "More variables " , C , D Print C ; " " ; D Input C Noecho echo Input "Enter your name " , S Print "Hello " ; S Input S Noecho echo Print S 'without 'supress

'unremark next line and remark all lines above for the TIMEOUT option 'this because when you use TIMEOUT once, you need to use it for all INPUT statements 'Input "Name " , S Timeout = 0 'Print Err ; " " ; s End

6.116 INPUTBIN Action

Read binary values from the serial port.

Syntax
INPUTBIN var1 [,var2] INPUTBIN #dev, var1 [,var2]

Remarks
var1 var2 #dev The variable that is assigned with the characters from the serial port. An optional second (or more) variable that is assigned with the characters from the serial. Device number. For use with OPEN and CLOSE. Dev is the device number.

The number of bytes to read is depending from the variable you use. When you use a byte variable, 1 character is read from the serial port. An integer will wait for 2 characters and an array will wait wait until the whole array is filled.

2013 MCS Electronics

176

BASCOM-8051 Note that the INPUTBIN statement doesn't wait for a <RETURN> but just for the number of bytes.

See also
PRINTBIN
204

, INPUT

173

, INPUTHEX

176

Example
Dim a as Byte, C as Integer INPUTBIN a, c 'wait for 3 characters End 'This code only for 80517 and 80537 with dual serial port Open "COM2:" For Binary As #1 'open serial channel 1 INPUTBIN #1, a Close #1

6.117 INPUTHEX Action

Allows input from the keyboard during program execution.

Syntax
INPUTHEX [" prompt" ] , var [ , varn ] [ NOECHO ] [TIMEOUT=xx]

Remarks
prompt Var,varn NOECHO TIMEOUT An optional string constant printed before the prompt character. A numeric variable to accept the input value. Disables input echoed back to the Comport. Optional delay time. When you specify the delay time, the routine will return when no input data is available after the specified time. No timer is used but 4 bytes are taken from the internal memory to provide a count down timer.

When you use the TIMEOUT option once, you must use it for all INPUT/INPUTHEX statements. Providing zero as the timeout parameter will wait for the longest possible time. The INPUTHEX routine can be used when you have a RS-232 interface on your uP. See the manual for a design of a RS-232 interface. The RS-232 interface can be connected to a serial communication port of your computer. This way you can use a terminal emulator and the keyboard as input device. You can also use the build in terminal emulator. If var is a byte then the input must be 2 characters long. If var is an integer/word then the input must be 4 characters long. If var is a long then the input must be 8 characters long.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

177

Difference with QB
In QB you can specify &H with INPUT so QB will recognize that a hexadecimal string is used. BASCOM implement a new statement : INPUTHEX.

See also
INPUT
173

, INPUTBIN

175

, PRINTBIN

204

Example
Dim x As Byte INPUTHEX " Enter a number " , x 'ask for input

6.118 INSTR Action

Returns the position of a sub string in a string.

Syntax
var = INSTR( start , string , substr ) var = INSTR( string , substr )

Remarks
Var Numeric variable that will be assigned with the position of the sub string in the string. Returns 0 when the sub string is not found. An optional numeric parameter that can be assigned with the first position where must be searched in the string. By default (when not used) the whole string is searched starting from position 1. The string to search. The search string.

Start

String Substr

At the moment INSTR() works only with internal strings. Support for external strings will be added too.

Difference with QB
No constants can be used for the string and sub string.

See also
None

Example
Dim S As String * 10 , Z As String * 5 Dim Bp As Byte S = "This is a test"

2013 MCS Electronics

178

BASCOM-8051 Z = "is" Bp = Instr(s , Z) : Print Bp Bp = Instr(4 , S , Z) : Print Bp End

'should print 3 'should print 6

6.119 LCASE Action

Converts a string into lower or upper case.

Syntax
dest = LCASE( source )

Remarks
dest source The string variable that will be assigned with the lower case of string SOURCE. The source string. The original string will be unchanged.

See also
UCASE
231

Example
Dim S As String * 12 , Z As String * 12 Input "Hello " , S S = Lcase(s) Print S S = Ucase(s) Print S 'assign string 'convert to lowercase 'print string 'convert to upper case 'print string

6.120 LCD Action

Send constant or variable to LCD display.

Syntax
LCD x

Remarks

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference X Variable or constant to display.

179

More variables can be displayed separated by the ; -sign LCD a ; b1 ; " constant" The LCD statement behaves just like the PRINT statement.

See also
LCDHEX
182

, $LCD

95

CONFIG LCD

125

Example
'-------------------------------------------------------------' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics '-------------------------------------------------------------' file: LCD.BAS ' demo: LCD, CLS, LOWERLINE, SHIFTLCD, SHIFTCURSOR, HOME ' CURSOR, DISPLAY '-------------------------------------------------------------$sim Rem The $sim statement will remove long delays for the simulator Rem It is important to remove this statement when compiling the final file 'Config Lcdpin = Pin , Db4 = P3.1 , Db5 = P3.2 , Db6 = P3.3 , Db7 = P3.4 , E = P3.5 , Rs = P3.6 Rem with the config lcdpin statement you can override the compiler settings

Dim A As Byte Config Lcd = 16 * 2 'configure lcd screen 'other options are 16 * 4 and 20 * 4, 20 * 2 , 16 * 1a 'When you dont include this option 16 * 2 is assumed '16 * 1a is intended for 16 character displays with split addresses over 2 lines '$LCD = address will turn LCD into 8-bit databus mode ' use this with uP with external RAM and/or ROM ' because it doesnt need the port pins ! Cls Lcd "Hello world." Wait 1 Lowerline Wait 1 Lcd "Shift this." line Wait 1 For A = 1 To 10 'clear the LCD display 'display this at the top line 'select the lower line 'display this at the lower

2013 MCS Electronics

180

BASCOM-8051 Shiftlcd Right Wait 1 Next For A = 1 To 10 Shiftlcd Left Wait 1 Next Locate 2 , 1 Lcd "*" Wait 1 Shiftcursor Right Lcd "@" Wait 1 Home Upper Lcd "Replaced." Wait 1 'shift the text to the right 'wait a moment

'shift the text to the left 'wait a moment

'set cursor position 'display this 'wait a moment 'shift the cursor 'display this 'wait a moment 'select line 1 and return home 'replace the text 'wait a moment

Cursor Off Noblink 'hide cursor Wait 1 'wait a moment Cursor On Blink 'show cursor Wait 1 'wait a moment Display Off 'turn display off Wait 1 'wait a moment Display On 'turn display on '-----------------NEW support for 4-line LCD-----Thirdline Lcd "Line 3" Fourthline Lcd "Line 4" Home Third 'goto home on line three Home Fourth Home F 'first letteer also works Locate 4 , 1 : Lcd "Line 4" Wait 1 'Now lets build a special character 'the first number is the characternumber (0-7) 'The other numbers are the rowvalues 'Use the LCD tool to insert this line Deflcdchar 0 , 31 , 17 , 17 , 17 , 17 , 17 , 31 , 0' replace ? with number (0-7) Deflcdchar 1 , 16 , 16 , 16 , 16 , 16 , 16 , 16 , 31' replace ? with number (0-7)

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

181

Cls 'select data RAM Rem it is important that a CLS is following the deflcdchar statements because it will set the controller back in datamode Lcd Chr(0) ; Chr(1) 'print the special character '----------------- Now use an internal routine -----------Acc = 1 'value into ACC Call Write_lcd 'put it on LCD End

6.121 LCDINIT Action

Reinitialize the LCD display.

Syntax
LCDINIT

Remarks
When you use any of the LCD display routines the LCD display will be initialized automatic at startup of your program. The LCD routines demand that the WR of the LCD display is connected to GND. When in your design the WR pin of the LCD is connected to a PIN of the micro processor, it will be high during the initialization and so the display will not be initialized properly. The LCDINIT routine allows you to perform initialization after you have set the pin that controls WR of the LCD to 0V.

See also
LCDHEX
182

, $LCD

95

CONFIG LCD

125

Example
'-------------------------------------------------------------' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics '-------------------------------------------------------------' file: LCD.BAS ' demo: LCD, CLS, LOWERLINE, SHIFTLCD, SHIFTCURSOR, HOME ' CURSOR, DISPLAY '-------------------------------------------------------------$sim Rem The $sim statement will remove long delays for the simulator Rem It is important to remove this statement when compiling the final file

2013 MCS Electronics

182

BASCOM-8051 'Config Lcdpin = Pin , Db4 = P3.1 , Db5 = P3.2 , Db6 = P3.3 , Db7 = P3.4 , E = P3.5 , Rs = P3.6 Rem with the config lcdpin statement you can override the compiler settings

Dim A As Byte Config Lcd = 16 * 2 'configure lcd screen 'other options are 16 * 4 and 20 * 4, 20 * 2 , 16 * 1a 'When you dont include this option 16 * 2 is assumed '16 * 1a is intended for 16 character displays with split addresses over 2 lines '$LCD = address will turn LCD into 8-bit databus mode ' use this with uP with external RAM and/or ROM ' because it doesnt need the port pins ! '----------------- these 2 lines can be used when WR is connected to P1.0 for example --P1.0 = 0 INITLCD '---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Cls 'clear the LCD display Lcd "Hello world." 'display this at the top line Wait 1 Lowerline 'select the lower line Wait 1 Lcd "Shift this." 'display this at the lower line

6.122 LCDHEX Action

Send variable in hexadecimal format to the LCD display.

Syntax
LCDHEX var

Remarks
var Variable to display. var1 : Byte, Integer, Word, Long, Single, Constant. The same rules apply as for PRINTHEX
205

See also
2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference LCD

178

183

Example
Dim a as byte a = 255 LCD a Lowerline LCDHEX a End

6.123 LEFT Action

Return the specified number of leftmost characters in a string.

Syntax
var = LEFT(var1 , n )

Remarks
var Var1 n The string that is assigned. The sourcestring. The number of characters to get from the sourcestring.

n : Byte, Integer, Word, Long, Constant. For string operations, all the strings must be of the same type : internal or external.

See Also
RIGHT
214

, MID

191

Example
Dim S As Xram String * 15 , Z As Xram String * 15 S = "ABCDEFG" Z = Left(s , 5) Print Z 'ABCDE End

6.124 LEN Action

Returns the length of a string.

Syntax
var = LEN( string )

2013 MCS Electronics

184

BASCOM-8051

Remarks
var string A numeric variable that is assigned with the length of string. The string to calculate the length of.

Example
Dim S As String * 12 Dim A As Byte S = "test" A = Len(s) Print A ' prints 4

6.125 LOAD Action

Load specified TIMER with a value for auto reload mode.

Syntax
LOAD TIMER , value

Remarks
TIMER Value TIMER0, TIMER1 or TIMER2. The variable or value to load.

When you use the ON TIMERx statement with the TIMER/COUNTER in mode 2, you can specify on which interval the interrupt must occur. The value can range from 1 to 255 for TIMER0 and TIMER1. For TIMER2 the range is 1-65535. The LOAD statement calculates the correct reload value out of the parameter. The formula : TLx = THx = (256-value) For TIMER2 : RCAP2L = RCAP2H = (65536 - value) The load statement is not intended to assign/read a value to/from the timers/ counters. Use COUNTER 132 x instead.

See Additional hardware

251

for more details

Example
LOAD TIMER0, 100 Will generate : Mov tl0,#h'9C Mov th0,#h'9C LOAD TIMER2, 1000 'load TIMER0 with 100

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference Will generate: Mov RCAP2L,#24 Mov RCAP2H,#252

185

6.126 LOCATE Action

Moves the LCD cursor to the specified position.

Syntax
LOCATE y , x

Remarks
X Y Constant or variable with the position. (1-64*) Constant or variable with the line (1 - 4*)

* depending on the used display For Graphical displays X can be in the range from 1-30 and y in the range from 1-8.

See also
CONFIG LCD
125

, LCD

178

, HOME

166

, CLS

115

Example
LCD "Hello" Locate 1,10 LCD "*"

6.127 LOOKUP Action

Returns a value from a table.

Syntax
var =LOOKUP( value, label )

Remarks
var value label The returned value A value with the index of the table The label where the data starts

var : Byte, Integer, Word, Long, Single. value : Byte, Integer, Word, Long, Constant.

2013 MCS Electronics

186

BASCOM-8051

See also
LOOKUPSTR
186

Example
Dim B1 As Byte , I As Integer B1 = Lookup(1 , Dta) Print B1 I = Lookup(0 , Dta2) End

' Prints 2 (zero based)

Dta: Data 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 Dta2: Data 1000% , 2000% 'integer data

6.128 LOOKUPSTR Action

Returns a string from a table.

Syntax
var =LOOKUPSTR( value, label [, language , length])

Remarks
var value label language length The string returned A value with the index of the table. The index is zero-based. That is, 0 will return the first element of the table. The label where the data starts An optional variable that holds a number to identify the language. The first language starts with the number 0. The length of the data for each language.

value : Byte, Integer, Word, Long, Constant. Range(0-255)

See also
LOOKUP
185

Example
Dim S As String * 8 , Idx As Byte

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference Idx = 0 : S = Lookupstr(idx , Sdata) Print S End Sdata: Data "This" , "is" , "a test"

187

'will print 'This'

Example 2
Dim S As String * 8 , Idx As Byte , Language As Byte Idx = 0 : Language = 1 S = Lookupstr(idx , Sdata , Language , 17) Print S ' will print 'Dit ' End Sdata: Data "This" , "is" , "a test " same length Data "Dit " , "is" , "een test" include a 0 byte

'each language data must have the 'the length is 17 because strings

6.129 LOW Action

Retrieves the least significant byte of a variable.

Syntax
var = LOW( s )

Remarks
Var S The variable that is assigned with the LSB of var S. The source variable to get the LSB from.

See also
HIGH
164

, LOWW

188

, HIGHW

165

Example
Dim I As Integer , Z As Byte I = &H1001 Z = Low(I) ' is 1

2013 MCS Electronics

188

BASCOM-8051

6.130 LOWW Action

Retrieves the two least significant bytes of a long.

Syntax
var = LOWW( s )

Remarks
var s The variable that is assigned with the two LSB of var S. The source variable to get the LSB's from.

See also
HIGHW
165

, HIGH

164

, LOW

187

Example
Dim L As Integer , Z As Long L = &H1001 Z = LowW(L)

6.131 LOWERLINE Action

Reset the LCD cursor to the lower line.

Syntax
LOWERLINE

Remarks
None

See also
UPPERLINE
232

, THIRDLINE

230

, FOURTHLINE

149

HOME

166

Example
LCD "Test" LOWERLINE LCD "Hello" End

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

189

6.132 MAKEBCD Action

Convert a variable into its BCD value.

Syntax
var1 = MAKEBCD(var2)

Remarks
var1 Var2 Variable that will be assigned with the converted value. Variable that holds the decimal value.

When you want to use an I2C clock device, which stores its values as BCD values you can use this function to convert variables from decimal to BCD. For printing the bcd value of a variable, you can use the BCD() function.

See also
MAKEDEC
189

, BCD()

112

Example
Dim a As Byte a = 65 LCD a Lowerline LCD BCD(a) a = MakeBCD(a) LCD " " ; a End

6.133 MAKEDEC Action

Convert a BCD byte or Integer/Word variable to its DECIMAL value.

Syntax
var1 = MAKEDEC(var2)

Remarks
var1 var2 Variable that will be assigned with the converted value. Variable that holds the BCD value.

When you want to use an I2C clock device which stores its values as BCD values you can use this function to convert variables from BCD to decimal.

2013 MCS Electronics

190

BASCOM-8051

See also
MAKEBCD
189

, BCD

112

Example
Dim a As Byte a = 65 LCD a Lowerline LCD BCD(a) a = MakeDEC(a) LCD " " ; a End

6.134 MAKEINT Action

Compacts 2 bytes into a word or integer.

Syntax
varn = MAKEINT(LSB , MSB)

Remarks
Varn LSB MSB Variable that will be assigned with the converted value. Variable or constant with the Least Significant Byte. Variable or constant with the Most Significant Byte.

The equivalent code is : varn = (256 * MSB) + LSB

See also
MAKEDEC
189

BCD()

112

Example
Dim a As Integer , I As Integer a=2 I = MakeINT(a , 1) 'I = (1 * 256) + 2 = 258 End

6.135 MAX Action

Returns the highest value of an array.

Syntax
var = MAX( ar(1) )

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

191

Remarks
Var ar() Numeric variable that will be assigned with the highest value of the array. The first array element of the array to return the highest value of.

At the moment MAX() works only with BYTE arrays. Support for other data types will be added too.

See also
MIN
192

, AVG

110

Example
Dim ar(10) As Byte Dim bP as Byte For bP = 1 to 10 ar(bP) = bP Next bP = Max(ar(1)) Print bP 'should print 10 End

6.136 MID Action

The MID function returns part of a string (a sub string). The MID statement replaces part of a string variable with another string.

Syntax
var = MID(var1 ,st [, l] ) MID(var ,st [, l] ) = var1

Remarks
Var Var1 St L The string that is assigned. The source string. The starting position. The number of characters to get/set.

Operations on strings require that all strings are of the same type(internal or external)

See also
LEFT
183

, RIGHT

214

Example

2013 MCS Electronics

192

BASCOM-8051 Dim S As Xram String * 15 , Z As Xram String * 15 S = "ABCDEFG" Z = Mid(s , 2 , 3) Print Z 'BCD Z = "12345" Mid(s , 2 , 2) = Z Print S 'A12DEFG End

6.137 MIN Action

Returns the lowest value of an array.

Syntax
var = MIN( ar(1) )

Remarks
Var ar() Numeric variable that will be assigned with the lowest value of the array. The first array element of the array to return the lowest value of.

At the moment MIN() works only with BYTE arrays. Support for other data types will be added too.

See also
MAX
190

, AVG

110

Example
Dim ar(10) As Byte Dim bP as Byte For bP = 1 to 10 ar(bP) = bP Next bP = Min(ar(1)) Print bP 'should print 1 End

6.138 MOD Action

Returns the remainder of a division.

Syntax
ret = var1 MOD var2

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

193

Remarks
Ret var1 var2 The variable that receives the remainder. The variable to divide. The divisor.

Example
a = 10 MOD 3 PRINT a 'divide 10 through 3 'print remainder (1)

6.139 MWINIT Action

Initializes the pins in order to use them with the micro wire statements.

Syntax
MWINIT

See also
CONFIG MICROWIRE
127

, MWREAD

193

, MWWRITE

195

, MWWOPCODE

194

6.140 MWREAD Action

Read a value from the micro wire bus.

Syntax
MWREAD variable , opcode , address, bytes

Remarks
Variable Opcode Address Bytes The variable that is assigned with the value retrieved from the micro wire bus. The opcode to use. The address of the device. Number of bytes to send.

See also
MWWRITE
195

, MWWOPCODE

194

, MWINIT

193

Example
'----------------------------------------------------------------' MicroWire test file

2013 MCS Electronics

194

BASCOM-8051 ' please read microwire specs for understanding microwire '----------------------------------------------------------------'CS - chip select 'DIN - data in 'DOUT - data Out 'CLOCK- Clock 'AL - address lines ' 93C46 93C56 93C57 93C66 '---------------------------------------------------------------------------' Data bits: 8 16 8 16 8 16 8 16 ' AL : 7 6 9 8 8 7 9 8 'you could use the same pin for DIN and DOUT 'we use a 93C46 and send bytes not words so AL is 7 Config Microwire = Pin , Cs = P1.1 , Din = P1.2 , Dout = P1.4 , Clock = P1.5 , Al = 7 'init pins Mwinit 'dimension variable used Dim X As Byte 'enable write to eeprom 'send startbit, opcode (00) and 11 + address 'Mwwopcode opcode, numberOfBits Mwwopcode &B1001100000 , 10 'the mwwopcode can send a command(opcode) to a device X = 10 'write value of X to address 0 'opcode is 01 'we write 1 byte 'Mwwrite var,opcode,address,numberOfBytes Mwwrite X , &B101 , 0 , 1 Waitms 10 X=0 'read back ' mwread var,opcode,address,numberofbytes Mwread X , &B110 , 0 , 1 'disable write 'send startbit, opcode (00) and 00 + address Mwwopcode &B1000000000 , 10 End

6.141 MWWOPCODE Action

Write an opcode to a micro wire device.

Syntax
MWWOPCODE opcode , bits

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

195

Remarks
Opcode Bits The opcode that needs to be send to the micro wire device. See the micro wire docs for the right values. The number of bits to send.

Before you can work with micro wire you must send an opcode to enable writing an EEPROM for example.

See also
MWINIT 193 , MWWRITE [****] 193
195

, MWREAD

193

Example
'enable write to EEPROM 'Needed bits : startbit (1), opcode (00) and (11) + address 'Mwwopcode opcode, numberOfBits Mwwopcode &B1001100000 , 10 'send the code

6.142 MWWRITE Action

Writes a value to the micro wire bus.

Syntax
MWWRITE variable , opcode , address, bytes

Remarks
Variable Opcode Address Bytes The variable which's content must be send to the micro wires device. The opcode to use. The address of the device. Number of bytes to send.

See also
MWINIT
193

, MWREAD

193

, MWWOPCODE

194

Example
'write value of X to address 0 'opcode is 01 and we write one byte Mwwrite X , &B101 , 0 , 1

2013 MCS Electronics

196

BASCOM-8051

6.143 NEXT Action

Ends a FOR..NEXT structure.

Syntax
NEXT [var]

Remarks
Var The index variable that is used as a counter when you form the structure with FOR var. Var is optional and not needed.

You must end each FOR statement with a NEXT statement.

See also
FOR
148

Example
Dim X As Byte , Y As Byte , A As Byte Y = 10 For A = 1 To 10 For X = Y To 1 Print X ; A Next Next A 'make y 10 'do this 10 times 'this one also 'print the values 'next x (count down) 'next a (count up) END

6.144 ON interrupt Action

Execute subroutine when specified interrupt occurs.

Syntax
ON interrupt label [NOSAVE]

Remarks
interrupt INT0, INT1, SERIAL, TIMER0 ,TIMER1 or TIMER2. Chip specific interrupts can be found under microprocessor support. Label NOSAVE The label to jump to if the interrupt occurs. When you specify NOSAVE, no registers are saved and restored in the interrupt routine. So when you use this option be sure to save and restore used registers.

You must return from the interrupt routine with the RETURN statement. You may have only one RETURN statement in your interrupt routine because the compiler restores the registers and generates a RETI instruction when it encounters

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference a RETURN statement in the ISR. You can't use TIMER1 when you are using SERIAL routines such as PRINT because TIMER1 is used as a BAUDRATE generator.

197

When you use the INT0 or INT1 interrupt you can specify on which condition the interrupt must be triggered. You can use the Set/Reset statement in combination with the TCON-register for this purpose. SET TCON.0 : trigger INT0 by falling edge. RESET TCON.0 : trigger INT0 by low level. SET TCON.2 : trigger INT1 by falling edge. RESET TCON.2 : trigger INT1 by low level. See Hardware
251

for more details

See Also
ON VALUE
197

Example
ENABLE INTERRUPTS ENABLE INT0 ON INT0 Label2 nosave DO LOOP END 'enable the interrupt 'jump to label2 on INT0 'endless loop

Label2: PRINT " A hardware interrupt occurred!" RETURN

'print message

6.145 ON value Action

Branch to one of several specified labels, depending on the value of a variable.

Syntax
ON var [GOTO] [GOSUB] label1 [, label2 ]

Remarks
Var label1, label2 The numeric variable to test. This can also be a SFR such as P1. The labels to jump to depending on the value of var.

Note that the value is zero based. So when var = 0, the first specified label is jumped/branched.

See Also
2013 MCS Electronics

198

BASCOM-8051 ON interrupt
196

Example
Dim X As Byte X = 2 On X Gosub Lbl1 , Lbl2 , Lbl3 X = 0 On X Goto Lbl1 , Lbl2 , Lbl3 End 'assign a variable interrupt 'jump to label lbl3

Lbl3: Print "lbl3" Return

Lbl1: nop Lbl2: nop 'nop is an ASM statement that does nothing

6.146 OPEN Action

Opens and closes a device.

Syntax
OPEN "device" for MODE As #channel CLOSE #channel

Remarks
Device There are 2 hardware devices supported: COM1 and COM2. With the software UART, you must specify the port pin and the baud rate. COM3.0:9600 will use PORT 3.0 at 9600 baud. Optional is ,INVERTED this will use inverted logic so you don't need MAX232 inverters. MODE Channel You can use BINARY, INPUT or OUTPUT for COM1 and COM2, but for the software UART pins, you must specify INPUT or OUTPUT. The number of the channel to open. Must be a positive constant.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

199

Since there are uP's such as the 80537 with 2 serial channels on board, the compiler must know which serial port you want to use. That is why the OPEN statement is implemented. With only 1 serial port on board, you don't need this statement. The statements that support the device are PRINT 203 , PRINTHEX 205 , INPUT 173 and INPUTHEX 176 . Every opened device must be closed using the CLOSE #channel statement. Of course you must use the same channel number. The software UART, only supports the GET 151 and PUT 207 statements to retrieve and send data and the PRINTBIN 204 and INPUTBIN 175 statement. The SW UART uses timed loops and interrupts can slow down these loops. So turn interrupts off before you use the SW UART. COM1: and COM2: are hardware ports, and can be used with PRINT etc. For the software UART it is important that the pin you use is bit addressable. In most cases a PORT is bit addressable but some chips have ports that are not bit addressable. When you use such a port you will get errors like : Error 208, bit variable not found. Since the OPEN statement doesn't use real file handles like DOS but only serves as a compiler directive, it is important that you must use the CLOSE statement as the last statement in your program. The following example shows when it will NOT WORK : OPEN "COM2:" FOR BINARY AS #1 'open the port PRINT #1, "Hello" 'print to serial 1 Gosub Test PRINT "Hello" 'print to serial 0 CLOSE #1 Test: Print #1, "test" Return Since the compiler frees the handle when it encounters the CLOSE statement, the PRINT #1, "test" code is never executed. To solve this you should put the CLOSE #1 statement under the Return statement. OPEN "COM2:" FOR BINARY AS #1 'open the port PRINT #1, "Hello" 'print to serial 1 Gosub Test PRINT "Hello" 'print to serial 0

Test: Print #1, "test" Return Close #1

See also
GET
151

, PUT

207

Example 1

2013 MCS Electronics

200

BASCOM-8051 'only works with a 80517 or 80537 CONFIG BAUD1 = 9600 'serial 1 baudrate OPEN "COM2:" FOR BINARY AS #1 'open the port PRINT #1, "Hello" 'print to serial 1 PRINT "Hello" 'print to serial 0 CLOSE #1 'close the channel

Example 2
'works with every port pin Dim A As Byte , S As String * 16 , I As Byte , Dum As Byte 'a software comport is named after the pin you use 'for example P3.0 will be "COM3.0:" (so there is no P) 'for software comports, you must provide the baudrate 'So for 9600 baud, the devicename is "COM3.0:9600" 'When you want to use the pin for sending, you must open the device for OUTPUT 'When you want to use the pin for receiving, you must open the device for INPUT 'At this time only variables can be sent and received with the PUT and GET statements. 'In the feature PRINT etc. will support these software comports. Open "com3.1:9600" For Output As #1 'p3.1 is normally used for tx so testing is easy Open "com3.0:9600,INVERTED" For Input As #2 'p3.0 is normally used for RX so testing is easy

S = "test this" Dum = Len(s) For I = 1 To Dum A = Mid(s , I , 1) Put #1 , A Next Do Get #2 , A Put #1 , A Print A Loop Close #1 Close #2 End

'assign string 'get length of string 'for all characters from left to right 'get character 'write it to comport

'get character from comport 'write it back 'use normal channel

' finally close device

6.147 OUT Action

Sends a byte to a hardware port or external memory address.

Syntax
OUT address, value

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

201

Remarks
address value The address where to send the byte to. The variable or value to send.

The OUT statement only works on systems with a uP that can address external memory.

See also
INP
173

, PEEK

202

, POKE

202

Example
Dim a as byte OUT &H8000,1 END Will generate : Mov A,#1 Mov dptr,#h'8000 Movx @dptr,a 'send 1 to the databus(d0-d7) at hex address 8000

6.148 PORT Action

P1 and P3 are special function registers that are treated as variables.

Syntax
Px = var var = Px

Remarks
X Var The number of the port. (1 or 3). P3.6 can't be used with an AT89C2051! The variable to retrieve or to set.

Note that other processors can have more ports such as P0, P2, P4 etc. When you select the proper .DAT file you can also use these ports as variables. In fact you can use any SFR as a byte variable in BASCOM. ACC = 0 'will reset the accumulator for example See hardware
251

for a more detailed description of the ports.

Example
Dim A As Byte , B1 As Bit

2013 MCS Electronics

202

BASCOM-8051 A = P1 A = A Or 2 P1 = A P1 = &B10010101 P1 = &HAF B1 = P1.1 P1.1 = 0 'get value from port 1 'manipulate it 'set port 1 with new value 'use binary notation 'use hex notation 'read pin 1.1 'set it to 0

6.149 PEEK Action

Returns a byte stored in internal memory.

Syntax
var = PEEK( address )

Remarks
var address Numeric variable that is assigned with the content of the memory location address Numeric variable or constant with the address location.(0-255)

See also
POKE
202

, CPEEK

134

, INP

173

, OUT

200

Example
DIM a As Byte a = Peek( 0 ) End 'return the first byte of the internal memory (r0)

6.150 POKE Action

Write a byte to an internal memory location.

Syntax
POKE address , value

Remarks
address value Numeric variable with the address of the memory location to set. (0255) Value to assign. (0-255)

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

203

Be careful with the POKE statement because you can change variables with it, which can cause your program to function incorrect.

See also
PEEK
202

, CPEEK

134

, INP

173

, OUT

200

Example
POKE 127, 1 End 'write 1 to address 127

6.151 POWERDOWN Action

Put processor into power down mode.

Syntax
POWERDOWN

Remarks
The power down mode stops the system clock completely. The only way to reactivate the micro controller is by system reset.

See also
IDLE
169

Example
POWERDOWN

6.152 PRINT Action

Send output to the RS-232 port.

Syntax
PRINT var ; " constant"

Remarks
var The variable or constant to print.

You can use a semicolon (;) to print more than one variable at one line. When you end a line with a semicolon, no linefeed will be added. The PRINT routine can be used when you have a RS-232 interface on your uP. See the manual for a design of an RS-232 interface.

2013 MCS Electronics

204

BASCOM-8051 The RS-232 interface can be connected to a serial communication port of your computer. This way you can use a terminal emulator as an output device. You can also use the build in terminal emulator.

See also
PRINTHEX
205

, INPUT

173

, OPEN

198

, CLOSE

198

, SPC

223

Example
'-------------------------------------------------------------' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics '-------------------------------------------------------------' file: PRINT.BAS ' demo: PRINT, PRINTHEX '-------------------------------------------------------------Dim A As Byte , B1 As Byte , C As Integer A = 1 Print "print variable a " ; A Print 'new line Print "Text to print." 'constant to print

B1 = 10 Printhex B1 C = &HA000 Printhex C Print C

'print in hexa notation 'assign value to c% 'print in hex notation 'print in decimal notation

C = -32000 Print C Printhex C Rem Note That Integers Range From -32767 To 32768 End

6.153 PRINTBIN Action

Print binary content of a variable to the serial port.

Syntax
PRINTBIN var [ ; varn] PRINTBIN #dev, var ; [,varn]

Remarks
var The variable which value is sent to the serial port.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference varn #dev Optional variables to send separated by a ;. Device number for use with OPEN and CLOSE

205

PRINTBIN is equivalent to PRINT CHR(var); but whole arrays can be printed this way. When you use a Long for example, 4 bytes are printed.

See also
INPUTBIN
175

, PRINT

203

, PRINTHEX

205

, INPUTHEX

176

Example
Dim a(10) as Byte, c as Byte For c = 1 To 10 a(c) = a 'fill array Next PRINTBIN a(1) 'print content 'This code only for 80517/80537 with dual serial port Open "COM2:" For Binary As #1 'open serial channel 1 PRINTBIN #1 , a(1) ; a(2) ; a(3) 'note that the channel is separated by a , and the vars by ; Close #1

6.154 PRINTHEX Action

Sends a variable in hexadecimal format to the serial port.

Syntax
PRINTHEX var

Remarks
var The variable to print.

The same rules apply to PRINTHEX as PRINT. The PRINTHEX routine can be used when you have a RS-232 interface on your uP. See the manual for a design of an RS-232 interface. The RS-232 interface can be connected to a serial communication port of your computer. This way you can use a terminal emulator as an output device. You can also use the build in terminal emulator.

See also
PRINT
203

, INPUTHEX

176

, SPC

223

2013 MCS Electronics

206

BASCOM-8051

Example
Dim x As Byte INPUT x PRINT x PRINTHEX "Hex " ; x 'ask for var 'print it in decimal format 'print it in hex format

6.155 PRIORITY Action

Sets the priority level of the interrupts.

Syntax
PRIORITY SET / RESET interrupt

Remarks
SET RESET Interrupt Bring the priority level of the interrupt to a higher level. Bring the priority level of the interrupt to a lower level. The interrupt to set or reset.

The interrupts are: INT0, INT1, SERIAL, TIMER0, TIMER1 and TIMER2. Interrupt INT0 always has the highest priority. When more interrupts occur at the same time the following order is used to handle the interrupts. Note that other microprocessors can have additional/other interrupt setting. Read microprocessor support 288 to check the additions. Interrupt INT0 TIMER0 INT1 TIMER1 SERIAL Priority 1 (highest) 2 3 4 5 (lowest)

Example
PRIORITY SET SERIAL ENABLE SERIAL ENABLE TIMER0 ENABLE INTERRUPTS ON SERIAL label DO LOOP 'serial int highest level 'enable serial int 'enable timer0 int 'activate interrupt handler 'branch to label if serial int occur 'loop for ever

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

207

Label: 'start label PRINT " Serial int occurred." 'print message RETURN 'return from interrupt

6.156 PSET Action

Sets or resets a single pixel.

Syntax
PSET X , Y, value

Remarks
X Y value The X location of the pixel. In range from 0-239. The Y location of the pixel. In range from 0-63. The value for the pixel. 0 will clear the pixel. 1 Will set the pixel.

The PSET is handy to create a simple data logger or oscilloscope.

See also
CONFIG GRAPHLCD
121

Example
Dim X as Byte, Y as Byte For X = 0 To 10 For Y = 0 To 10 Pset X , Y , 1 Next Next End 'make a nice block

6.157 PUT Action

Sends a byte to the software UART.

Syntax
PUT #channel , var

Remarks
channel var Positive numeric constant that refers to the opened channel. A variable or constant who's value is sent to the the software UART.

2013 MCS Electronics

208

BASCOM-8051

See also
GET
151

, PRINT

203

, INPUT

173

, OPEN

198

Example
Open "com3.1:9600" For Output As #1 tx so testing is easy Open "com3.0:9600" For Input As #2 RX so testing is easy 'p3.1 is normally used for 'p3.0 is normally used for

S = "test this" Dum = Len(s) For I = 1 To Dum A = Mid(s , I , 1) Put #1 , A Next Do Get #2 , A Put #1 , A Print A Loop

'assign string 'get length of string 'for all characters from left to right 'get character 'write it to comport

'get character from comport 'write it back 'use normal channel

Close #1 Close #2 End

' finally close device

6.158 READ Action

Reads those values and assigns them to variables.

Syntax
READ var

Remarks
var Variable that is assigned data value.

Difference with QB
It is important that the variable is of the same type as the stored data.

See also
DATA
136

, RESTORE

212

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

209

Example
Dim A As Byte, I As Byte, C As Integer, S As XRAM String * 10 RESTORE dta FOR a = 1 TO 3 READ i : PRINT i NEXT RESTORE DTA2 READ C : PRINT C READ C : PRINT C Restore dta3 : Read s : Print s END dta: Data 5,10,15 dta2: Data 1000%, -2000% dta3: Data " hello"

6.159 READMAGCARD Action

Reads data from a magnetic card reader.

Syntax
READMAGCARD var , bytes , code, timeout

Remarks
Var bytes Shifts Timeout A byte array large enough to store the data from the magnetic card reader. The number of bytes read from the card. The coding used. Must be 5 or 7. In version 2.03 only 5 is supported. A LONG variable or constant that the routine will wait for a card. Err will be set when no card is detected within Timeout.

There can be 3 tracks on a magnetic card. Track 1 strores the data in 7 bit including the parity bit. This is handy to store alpha numeric data. On track 2 and 3 the data is stored with 5 bit coding. The ReadMagCard routine works with ISO7811-2 5 and 7 bit decoding. The returned numbers for 5 bit coding are: Returned number 0 1 2 ISO characterT 0 1 2

2013 MCS Electronics

210

BASCOM-8051 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 hardware control start byte hardware control separator hardware control stop byte

See also
None

Calls
_Read_Magcard_Code5

Example
'[DIM used variables] Dim X(40) As Byte , I As Byte , Bts As Byte '[ALIAS the pins used] _mcs Alias P1.1 _mclock Alias P1.2 _mdata Alias P1.0 Do Print "Slide magcard through reader" Readmagcard X(1) , Bts , 5, 10000 ' Print "Error " ; Err Print ; " " ; Bts ; " bytes read" Print Err For I = 1 To Bts Print X(i) ; " "; Next Print 'show number 'call routine '1 if error occured 'show number of bytes read ^ may be 5 or 7. 7 bit coding not implemented yet

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference Loop End

211

6.160 REM Action

Instruct the compiler that comment will follow.

Syntax
REM or '

Remarks
You can comment your program for clarity. You can use REM or ' followed by your comment. All statements after REM or ' are treated as comment so you cannot use statements after a REM statement. It is also possible to use block comments: '( start block comment print "This will not be compiled ') end block comment Note that the starting ' sign will ensure compatibility with QB Each block must be closed with a ')

Example
REM TEST.BAS version 1.00 PRINT a ' " this is comment : PRINT " hello" ^--- this will not be executed!

6.161 REPLACE Action

Replace all occurrences of a single character in a string.

Syntax
REPLACE string , old , new

Remarks
string old new The source string to change. A string constant or byte that specifies the character to replace. The new character. Also a string constant or a byte.

Example
Dim S as String * 12

2013 MCS Electronics

212

BASCOM-8051 s = "Hello" REPLACE s , "e" , "a" Print s

' '

now we got some dutch :-) should print Hallo

6.162 RESET Action

Reset a bit of a PORT (P1.x, P3.x) or an internal bit/byte/integer/word/long variable.

Syntax
RESET bit RESET var.x

Remarks
bit var x Can be a P1.x, P3.x or any bitvariable where x=0-7. Can be a byte, integer or word variable. Constant of variable to reset.(0-7) for bytes and (0-15) for Integer/ Word. 0-31 for a LONG.

See also
SET
216

Example
Dim b1 as bit, b2 as byte, I as Integer RESET P1.3 'reset bit 3 of port 1 RESET b1 'bitvariable RESET b2.0 'reset bit 0 of bytevariable b2 RESET I.15 'reset MS bit from I

6.163 RESTORE Action

Allows READ to reread values in specified DATA statements.

Syntax
RESTORE label

Remarks
Label The label of a DATA statement.

See also
DATA
136

, READ

208

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

213

Example
DIM a AS BYTE, I AS BYTE RESTORE dta FOR a = 1 TO 3 READ a : PRINT a NEXT RESTORE DTA2 READ I : PRINT I READ I : PRINT I END DTA1: Data 5, 10, 100 DTA2: Data -1%, 1000% Integers must end with the %-sign. (Integer : <0 or >255)

6.164 RETURN Action

Return from a subroutine.

Syntax
RETURN

Remarks
Subroutines must be ended with a related RETURN statement. Interrupt subroutines must also be terminated with the Return statement.

See also
GOSUB
162

Example
Dim Result As Byte , Y As Byte Gosub Pr Print Result End Pr: Result = 5 * Y Result = Result + 100 Return 'jump to subroutine 'print result 'program ends 'start subroutine with label 'do something stupid 'add something to it 'return

2013 MCS Electronics

214

BASCOM-8051

6.165 RIGHT Action

Return a specified number of rightmost characters in a string.

Syntax
var = RIGHT(var1 ,st )

Remarks
var Var1 st The string that is assigned. The sourcestring. The starting position.

All strings must be of the same data type, internal or external.

See also
LEFT
183

, MID

191

Example
Dim s As XRAM String * 15, z As XRAM String * 15 s = "ABCDEFG" z = Right(s,2) Print z 'FG End

6.166 RND Action

Returns a random number.

Syntax
var = RND(limit)

Remarks
Limit The maximum number that will be assigned to the random number.

The RND() function uses 2 internal bytes to store the value of the random seed. It is important to understand that the RND() function is a math function. Every time you reset the micro, it will produce the same sequence. Only when you vary the variables with for example a timer, temperature reading, or a clock, you can make a more random value.

See also
2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference NONE

215

Example
'--------------------------------------------------------' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics ' RND.BAS '--------------------------------------------------------Dim W As Word Do 'get a random number and limit it to be maximum 100 W = Rnd(100) Print W Loop End

6.167 ROTATE Action

Shifts all bits one place to the left or right.

Syntax
ROTATE var , LEFT/RIGHT [ , shifts]

Remarks
Var Shifts Byte, Integer/Word or Long variable. The number of shifts to perform.

Note that the behavior of ROTATE is just like the ASM RL or RR mnemonic. It works for integer, words, single and longs also. All bits in the variable are preserved so for a byte after 8 rotations, the value will be the same.

See also
SHIFTIN
218

, SHIFTOUT

218

, SHIFT

217

Calls
_ROTATE_LEFT or _ROTATE_RIGHT

Example
Dim a as Byte a = 128 ROTATE a, LEFT , 2 Print a '1

2013 MCS Electronics

216

BASCOM-8051

6.168 SELECT Action

Executes one of several statement blocks depending on the value of a variable.

Syntax
SELECT CASE var CASE test1 : statements [CASE test2 : statements ] CASE ELSE : statements END SELECT

Remarks
var Test1 Test2 Variable. to test Value to test for. Value to test for.

See also
IF THEN
169

Example
Dim b2 as byte SELECT CASE b2 'set bit 1 of port 1 CASE 2 : PRINT "2" CASE 4 : PRINT "4" CASE IS >5 : PRINT ">5" 'a test requires the IS keyword CASE 10 TO 20 'test the range from 10 to 20 CASE ELSE END SELECT END

6.169 SET Action

Set a bit of a PORT(P1.x,P3.x) or a bit/byte/integer/word/long variable.

Syntax
SET bit SET var.x

Remarks
Bit Var P1.x, P3.x or a Bit variable. A byte, integer, word or long variable.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference X Bit of variable (0-7) to set. (0-15 for Integer/Word) and 0-31 for a LONG.

217

See also
RESET
212

Example
Dim b1 as Bit, b2 as byte, c as Word SET P1.1 'set bit 1 of port 1 SET b1 'bitvariable SET b2.1 'set bit 1 of var b2 SET C.15 'set highest bit of Word

6.170 SHIFTCURSOR Action

Shift the cursor of the LCD display left or right by one position.

Syntax
SHIFTCURSOR LEFT | RIGHT

See also
SHIFTLCD
219

, LCD

178

, CLS

115

, LOCATE

185

, HOME

166

Example
LCD "Hello" SHIFTCURSOR LEFT End

6.171 SHIFT Action

Shifts all bits one place to the left or right.

Syntax
SHIFT var , LEFT/RIGHT [ , shifts]

Remarks
Var Shifts Byte, Integer/Word or Long variable. The number of shifts to perform.

The SHIFT statements shifts all bits to the left or right and so for a byte after 8 shifts, the byte will be zero.

2013 MCS Electronics

218

BASCOM-8051

See also
SHIFTIN
218

, SHIFTOUT

218

ROTATE

215

Example
Dim a as Word a = 128 SHIFT a, LEFT , 1 Print a '256

6.172 SHIFTIN Action

Shifts a bit stream in or out a variable.

Syntax
SHIFTIN pin , pclock , var , option [PRE] SHIFTOUT pin , pclock , var , option

Remarks
pin pclock var option The portpin which serves as as input/output. The portpin which generates the clock. The variable that is assigned. Option can be : 0 - MSB shifted in/out first when clock goes low 1 - MSB shifted in/out first when clock goes high 2 - LSB shifted in/out first when clock goes low 3 - LSB shifted in/out first when clock goes high For the SHIFTIN statement you can add 4 to the parameter to use the external clock signal for shifting. PRE Add this additional parameter (no comma) to sample the input pin before the clock signal is generated.

It depends on the type of the variable, how many shifts will occur. When you use a byte, 8 shifts will occur and for an integer, 16 shifts will occur.

See also
NONE

Example
Dim a as byte SHIFTIN P1.0 , P1.1 , a , 0 SHIFTOUT P1.2 , P1.1 , a , 0

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference For the SHIFTIN example the following code is generated: Setb P1.1 Mov R0,#h'21 Mov r2,#h'01 __UNQLBL1: Mov r3,#8 __UNQLBL2: Clr P1.1 Nop Nop Mov c,P1.0 Rlc a Setb P1.1 Nop Nop Djnz r3,__UNQLBL2 Mov @r0,a Dec r0 Djnz r2,__UNQLBL1 Of course, it depends on the parameter, which code will be generated. To shift with an external clock signal: SHIFTIN P1.0, P1.1 , a , 4 'add 4 for external clock Generated code: Mov R0,#h'21 Mov r2,#h'01 __UNQLBL1: Mov r3,#8 __UNQLBL2: Jnb P1.1,*+0 Mov c,P1.0 Rlc a Jb P1.1,*+0 Djnz r3,__UNQLBL2 Mov @r0,a Dec r0 Djnz r2,__UNQLBL1

219

6.173 SHIFTLCD Action

Shift the LCD display left or right by one position.

Syntax
SHIFTLCD LEFT / RIGHT

Remarks
NONE

2013 MCS Electronics

220

BASCOM-8051

See also
SHIFTCURSOR
217

, CLS

115

, LCD

178

, HOME

166

, LOCATE

185

Example
LCD "Very long text" SHIFTLCD LEFT Wait 1 SHIFTLCD RIGHT End

6.174 SHOWPIC Action

Shows a BGF file on the graphic display

Syntax
SHOWPIC x, y , label

Remarks
Showpic can display a converted BMP file. The BMP must be converted into a BGF file with the Tools Grahic Converter 54 . The X and Y parameters specify where the picture must be displayed. X and Y must be 0 or a multiple of 8. The picture height and width must also be an multiple of 8. The label tells the compiler where the graphic data is located. It points to a label where you put the graphic data with the $BGF directive.

See also
$BGF
90

, CONFIG GRAPHLCD

121

, PSET

207

Example
CLS GRAPH ShowPic 0,0, label End Label: $BGF "mypic.bgf" 'clear graphic part of display 'show picture

'data will be inserted here

6.175 SOUND Action

Sends pulses to a port pin.

Syntax
SOUND pin, duration, frequency [,NOINT]

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

221

Remarks
Pin duration Frequency NOINT Any I/O pin such as P1.0 etc. The number of pulses to send. Byte, integer/word or constant. (1- 32768). The time the pin is pulled low and high. An option to disable interrupts during the sound statement.

When you connect a speaker or a buzzer to a port pin (see hardware) , you can use the SOUND statement to generate some tones. The NOINT will clear the global interrupts so no interrupts can occur during the sound statement. When the sound statement has completed the interrupt register is restored. The port pin is switched high and low for frequency uS. The pin will be in the low state when the sound statement ends. This loop is executed duration times.

See also
SOUNDEXT
221

Example
SOUND P1.1 , 10000, 10 End 'BEEP

6.176 SOUNDEXT Action

Sends pulses to a port pin.

Syntax
SOUND pin, duration, frequency [,NOINT]

Remarks
Pin duration Any I/O pin such as P1.0 etc. This is an integer, word or constant that specifies how long the sound is generated. A bigger value will result in a longer duration of the sound. This is an integer, word, or constant that that will be used to generate the frequency. A higher value will result in a higher frequency. A very low value might result in a sound that can not be heard. An option to disable interrupts during the sound statement.

Frequency

NOINT

The SOUNDEXT should be used instead of the SOUND statement. It has a wider range.

2013 MCS Electronics

222

BASCOM-8051 When you connect a speaker or a buzzer to a port pin (see hardware) , you can use the SOUNDEXT statement to generate some tones. The NOINT will clear the global interrupts so no interrupts can occur during the sound statement. When the sound statement has completed the interrupt register is restored. The SoundExt routine will create the sound as following: The port pin is set LOW The specified frequency is inverted The inverted value is decreased The port pin is set HIGH The inverted value is restored and decreased again The actions are executed for DURATION times. When the statement is ready, it will leave the pin in the HIGH state. The time the pin is low is exact the same time as the pin is high. So the created pulse width is 50%. Since loops are used, the frequency is relatively to the processor speed. The width range of the frequency will ensure that you can create hearable tones width a variety of oscillator values. When you want to create tones that are independent of the processor speed, you need to use a timer.

See also
SOUND
220

Example
$regfile = "89s4051.dat" $crystal = 8000000 Dim X As Word X = 0 Do X = X - 10 Soundext P3.4 , 500 , X Waitms 1 Loop

6.177 SPACE Action

Returns a string of spaces.

Syntax
var = SPACE(x )

Remarks
X Var The number of spaces. The string that is assigned.

Using 0 for x, will result in a string of 255 bytes because there is no check for a zero

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference length assign.

223

See also
STRING
228

, SPC

223

Example
Dim s as XRAM String * 15, z as XRAM String * 15 s = Space(5) Print " {" ;s ; " }" '{ } Dim A as Byte A=3 S = Space(a) Genereated code for last 2 lines : ; ---------- library routine ----------_sStr_String: Mov @r1,a Inc r1 Djnz r2,_sStr_String Clr a Mov @r1,a Ret ;--------------------------------------Mov R1,#h'22 ; location of string Mov R2,h'21 ; number of spaces Mov a,#32 Acall _sStr_String

6.178 SPC Action

Prints spaces to the serial port or LCD display.

Syntax
PRINT SPC(x )

Remarks
x The number of spaces to print. Range from 1 - 255.

Use SPACE() function to assign spaces to a string. SPC() can only be used in combination with PRINT and LCD.

See Also
SPACE
222

Example
Dim s as XRAM String * 15, z as XRAM String * 15

2013 MCS Electronics

224

BASCOM-8051 s = "Hello" Print " {" ;s ; SPC(3) ; "}"

6.179 SPIIN Action

Reads a value from the SPI-bus.

Syntax
SPIIN var, bytes

Remarks
Var Bytes The variable that is assigned with the value read from the SPI-bus. The number of bytes to read.

See also
SPIOUT
225

, CONFIG SPI

130

, SPIINIT

224

Example
Dim a(10) as byte CONFIG SPI = SOFT, DIN = P1.0, DOUT = P1.1, CS=P1.2, CLK = P1.3 SPIINIT SPIIN a(1) , 4 'read 4 bytes

6.180 SPIINIT Action

Initializes the pins of the SPI-bus.

Syntax
SPIINIT

Remarks
The pins used for the SPI bus must be set to the proper logical level before you can use the SPI commands.

See also
SPIOUT
225

, CONFIG SPI

130

, SPIIN

224

Example
Dim a(10) as byte CONFIG SPI = SOFT, DIN = P1.0, DOUT = P1.1, CS=P1.2, CLK = P1.3 SPIINIT

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference SPIIN a(1) , 4 'read 4 bytes

225

6.181 SPIOUT Action

Sends a value of a variable to the SPI-bus.

Syntax
SPIOUT var , bytes

Remarks
var bytes The variable woes content must be send to the SPI-bus. The number of bytes to send.

See also
SPIIN
224

, CONFIG SPI

130

, SPIINIT

224

Example
CONFIG SPI = SOFT, DIN = P1.0, DOUT = P1.1, CS=P1.2, CLK = P1.3 SPIINIT init SPI pins Dim a(10) as Byte , X As Byte SPIOUT a(1) , 5 'send 5 bytes SPIOUT X , 1 'send 1 byte

6.182 START Action

Start the specified timer/counter.

Syntax
START timer

Remarks
timer TIMER0, TIMER1, TIMER2, COUNTER0 or COUNTER1.

You must start a timer/counter in order for an interrupt to occur (when the external gate is disabled). TIMER0 and COUNTER0 are the same device.

See also
STOP TIMERx
226

2013 MCS Electronics

226

BASCOM-8051

Example
ON TIMER0 label2 LOAD TIMER0, 100 START TIMER0 DO 'start loop LOOP 'loop forever label2: RETURN 'perform an action here

6.183 STOP Action

Stop program execution.

Syntax
STOP

Remarks
END can also be used to terminate a program. When an END or STOP statement is encountered a never ending loop is generated.

See Also
STOP TIMER
226

, START

225

Example
PRINT var STOP 'print something 'thats it

6.184 STOP Timer Action

Stop the specified timer/counter.

Syntax
STOP timer

Remarks
timer TIMER0, TIMER1, TIMER2, COUNTER0 or COUNTER1.

You can stop a timer when you don't want an interrupt to occur.

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference TIMER0 and COUNTER0 are the same.

227

See also
START TIMERx
225

, STOP

226

Example
'-------------------------------------------------------------' (c) 1995-2006 MCS Electronics '-------------------------------------------------------------' file: TIMER0.BAS ' demo: ON TIMER0 ' *TIMER1 is used for RS-232 baudrate generator '-------------------------------------------------------------Dim Count As Byte , Gt As Byte Config Timer0 = Timer , Gate = Internal , Mode = 2 'Timer0 = counter : timer0 operates as a counter 'Gate = Internal : no external gate control 'Mode = 2 : 8-bit auto reload (default) On Timer0 Timer_0_int Load Timer0 , 100 interrupt will occur Enable Interrupts Enable Timer0

'when the timer reaches 100 an 'enable the use of interrupts 'enable the timer

Rem Setting Of Priority Priority Set Timer0 Start Timer0 Count = 0 Do Input "Number " , Gt Print "You entered : " ; Gt Loop Until Gt = 1 until users enters 1 Stop Timer0 End

'highest priority 'start the timer 'reset counter

'loop

Rem The Interrupt Handler For The Timer0 Interrupt Timer_0_int: Inc Count If Count = 250 Then Print "Timer0 Interrupt occured" Count = 0

2013 MCS Electronics

228

BASCOM-8051 End If Return

6.185 STR Action

Returns a string representation of a number.

Syntax
var = STR( x )

Remarks
Var X A string variable. A numeric variable.

The string must be big enough to store the string.

See also
VAL
232

, HEX

163

, HEXVAL

164

Difference with QB
In QB STR() returns a string with a leading space. This behaviour is not in BASCOM.

Example
Dim a as Byte, S as XRAM String * 10 a = 123 s = Str(a) Print s End

6.186 STRING Action

Returns a string consisting of m repetitions of the character with ASCII code n.

Syntax
var = STRING(m ,n )

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

229

Remarks
Var N M The string that is assigned. The ASCII-code that is assigned to the string. The number of characters to assign.

Since a string is terminated by a 0 byte, you can't use 0 for n. Using 0 for m will result in a string of 255 bytes, because there is no check on a length assign of 0. When you need this let me know.

See also
SPACE
222

Example
Dim s as XRAM String * 15 s = String(5,65) Print s 'AAAAA End

6.187 SUB Action

Defines a Sub procedure.

Syntax
SUB Name[(var1)]

Remarks
name var1 Name of the sub procedure, can be any non reserved word. The name of the parameter.

You must end each subroutine with the END SUB statement.

You must Declare Sub procedures before the SUB statement. The parameter names and types must be the same in both the declaration and the Sub procedure. Parameters are global to the application. That is the used parameters must be dimensioned with the DIM statement. Therefore, the variables can be used by the program and sub procedures. The following examples will illustrate this : Dim a as byte, b1 as byte, c as byte 'dim used variables Declare Sub Test(a as byte) 'declare subroutine a = 1 : b1 = 2: c = 3 'assign variables Print a ; b1 ; c 'print them

2013 MCS Electronics

230

BASCOM-8051 Call Test(b1) Print a ;b1 ; c End Sub Test(a as byte) print a ; b1 ; c End Sub 'call subroutine 'print variables again

'begin procedure/subroutine 'print variables

See also
CALL
113

, DECLARE

139

Example
NONE

6.188 SWAP Action

Exchange two variables of the same type.

Syntax
SWAP var1, var2

Remarks
var1 var2 A variable of type bit, byte, integer or word. A variable of the same type as var1.

After the swap, var1 will hold the value of var2 and var2 will hold the value of var1.

Example
Dim a as integer,b1 as integer a = 1 : b1 = 2 'assign two integers SWAP a, b1 'swap them PRINT a ; b1

6.189 THIRDLINE Action

Reset LCD cursor to the third line.

Syntax
THIRDLINE

Remarks

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference NONE

231

See also
UPPERLINE
232

, LOWERLINE

188

, FOURTHLINE

149

Example
Dim a as byte a = 255 LCD a Thirdline LCD a Upperline End

6.190 UCASE Action

Converts a string into upper case.

Syntax
dest = UCASE( source )

Remarks
dest source The string variable that will be assigned with the upper case of string SOURCE. The source string. The original string will be unchanged.

See also
LCASE
178

Example
Dim S As String * 12 , Z As String * 12 Input "Hello " , S S = Lcase(s) Print S S = Ucase(s) Print S 'assign string 'convert to lowercase 'print string 'convert to upper case 'print string

2013 MCS Electronics

232

BASCOM-8051

6.191 UPPERLINE Action

Reset LCD cursor to the upper line.

Syntax
UPPERLINE

Remarks
NONE

See also
LOWERLINE
188

, THIRDLINE

230

, FOURTHLINE

149

Example
Dim a as byte a = 255 LCD a Lowerline LCD a Upperline End

6.192 VAL Action

Converts a string representation of a number into a number.

Syntax
var = Val( s )

Remarks
Var S A numeric variable that is assigned with the value of s. Variable of the string type.

var : Byte, Integer, Word, Long, Single.

See also
STR
228

, HEXVAL

164

Example
Dim a as byte, s As XRAM string * 10 s = "123" a = Val(s) 'convert string

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference Print a End

233

6.193 VARPTR Action

Retrieves the memory-address of a variable.

Syntax
var = VARPTR( var2 )

Remarks
Var var2 The variable that is assigned with the address of var2. A variable to retrieve the address from.

See also
PEEK
202

POKE

202

Example
Dim I As Integer , B1 As Byte B1 = Varptr(I) Generated code: Mov h'23,#h'21

6.194 WAIT Action

Suspends program execution for a given time.

Syntax
WAIT seconds

Remarks
seconds The number of seconds to wait.

The delay time is based on the used X-tal (frequency). When you use interrupts the delay can be extended.

See also
DELAY
141

, WAITMS

234

, WAITMSE

235

2013 MCS Electronics

234

BASCOM-8051

Example
WAIT 3 Print "*" 'wait for three seconds

6.195 WAITKEY Action

Wait until a character is received in the serial buffer.

Syntax
var = WAITKEY() var = WAITKEY(#channel)

Remarks
Var channel Variable that is assigned with the ASCII value of the serial buffer. The channel number of the device

var : Byte, Integer, Word, Long, String.

See also
INKEY
171

Example
Dim A As Byte A = Waitkey Print A 'wait for character

Example
Dim A As Byte Open "COM2:" For Binary As #1 'open serial chan.1 COM2 of 80517/80537 Dim St As Byte St = Inkey(#1) 'get key St = Inkey() 'get key from COM1 (the default)

6.196 WAITMS Action

Suspends program execution for a given time in mS.

Syntax
WAITMS mS

Remarks
mS The number of milliseconds to wait. (1-255)

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference

235

The delay time is based on the used X-tal (frequency). The use of interrupts can slow down this routine. This statement is provided for the I2C statements. When you write to an EEPROM you must wait for 10 mS after the write instruction.

See also
DELAY
141

, WAIT

233

, WAITMSE

235

Example
WAITMS 10 Print "*" 'wait for 10 mS

6.197 WAITMSE Action

Suspends program execution for a given time in mS.

Syntax
WAITMS mS

Remarks
mS The number of milliseconds to wait. (1-65535)

The delay time is based on the used X-tal (frequency). So it is important that you provide the right $CRYSTAL

92

value.

The use of interrupts can slow down this routine. For a real precise delay you should use a timer. The WAITMS statement can only delay for 255 mS. That is why the WAITMSE statement was added, it can give a longer delay.

See also
DELAY
141

, WAIT

233

, WAITMS

234

Example
WAITMSE 1000 Print "*" 'wait for 1000 mS

6.198 WATCHDOG Action

Start and stop the watchdog timer.

Syntax
2013 MCS Electronics

236

BASCOM-8051 START WATCHDOG 'will start the watchdog timer. STOP WATCHDOG 'will stop the watchdog timer. RESET WATCHDOG 'will reset the watchdog timer.

Remarks
The AT89S8252 has a built in watchdog timer. A watchdog timer is a timer that will reset the uP when it reaches a certain value. So during program execution this WD-timer must be reset before it exceeds its maximum value. This is used to be sure a program is running correct. When a program crashes or sits in an endless loop it will not reset the WD-timer so an automatic reset will occur resulting in a restart. You need to configure the reset time with CONFIG WATCHDOG. CONFIG WATCHDOG = value value The time in mS it takes the WD will overflow, causing a reset. Possible values are : 16,32,64,128,256,512,1024 or 2048

See Also
CONFIG WATCHDOG
132

Example
DIM A AS INTEGER CONFIG WATCHDOG = 2048 START WATCHDOG DO PRINT a a=a+1 REM RESET WATCHDOG LOOP END 'after 2 seconds a reset will occur 'start the WD

'notice the reset 'delete the REM to run properly

6.199 WHILE .. WEND Action

Executes a series of statements in a loop, as long as a given condition is true.

Syntax
WHILE condition statements WEND

Remarks
If the condition is true then any intervening statements are executed until the WEND statement is encountered. BASCOM then returns to the WHILE statement and checks condition. If it is still true, the process is repeated. If it is not true, execution resumes with the statement following the WEND

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Language Reference statement.

237

See also
DO .. LOOP
144

, FOR .. NEXT

148

Example
Dim A As Byte While A <= 10 Print A Incr A Wend

2013 MCS Electronics

Part

VII

Using assembly

239

7
7.1

Using assembly
Using assemly In line assembly
Assembler statements are recognized by the compiler. The only exception is SWAP because this is a valid BASIC statement. You must precede this ASM-statement with the !-sign so the compiler knows that you mean the ASM SWAP statement. Note that for the ACC register, A is used in mnemonics.( Except for bit operations ) Example: Mov a, #10 'ok Mov acc,#10 'also ok but generates 1 more byte Setb acc.0 'ok Setb a.0 'NOT OK You can also include an assembler file with the $INCLUDE FILE.ASM statement. The assembler is based on the standard Intel mnemonics. The following codes are used to describe the mnemonics: Rn Direct @Ri #data #data16 Bit working register R0-R7 128 internal RAM locations, any IO port, control or status register. For example : P1, P3, ACC indirect internal RAM location addressed by register R0 or R1 8-bit constant included in instruction 16-bit constant included in instruction 128 software flags, any IO pin, control or status bit For example : ACC.0, P1.0, P1.1

Boolean variable manipulation CLR C CLR bit SETB C SETB bit CPL C CPL bit ANL C, bit ORL C,bit MOV C,bit clear carry flag clear direct bit set carry flag set direct bit complement carry flag complement direct bit AND direct bit to carry flag OR direct bit to carry flag Move direct bit to carry flag

Program and machine control

2013 MCS Electronics

240

BASCOM-8051 LCALL addr16 RET RETI LJMP addr16 SJMP rel JMP @A+DPTR JZ rel JNZ rel JC rel JNC rel JB bit,rel JNB bit,rel JBC bit,rel CJNE A,direct,rel CJNE A,#data,rel CJNE Rn,#data,rel CJNE @Ri,#data,rel DJNZ Rn,rel DJNZ direct,rel NOP long subroutine call return from subroutine return from interrupt long jump short jump (relative address) jump indirect relative to the DPTR jump if accu is zero jump if accu is not zero jump if carry flag is set jump if carry flag is not set jump if direct bit is set jump if direct bit is not set jump if direct bit is set & clear bit compare direct to A & jump of not equal comp. I'mmed. to A & jump if not equal comp. I'mmed. to reg. & jump if not equal comp. I'mmed. to ind. & jump if not equal decrement register & jump if not zero decrement direct & jump if not zero No operation

Arithmetic operations ADD A,Rn ADD A,direct ADD A,@Ri ADD A,#data ADDC A,Rn ADDC A,direct ADDC A,@Ri ADDC A,#data SUBB A,Rn SUBB A,direct SUBB A,@Ri SUBB A,#data INC A add register to accu add register byte to accu add indirect RAM to accu add immediate data to accu add register to accu with carry add direct byte to accu with carry flag add indirect RAM to accu with carry flag add immediate data to accu with carry flag subtract register from A with borrow subtract direct byte from A with borrow subtract indirect RAM from A with borrow subtract immediate data from A with borrow increment accumulator

2013 MCS Electronics

Using assembly INC Rn INC direct INC@Ri DEC A DEC Rn DEC direct DEC@Ri INC DPTR MUL AB DIV AB DA A increment register increment direct byte increment indirect RAM decrement accumulator decrement register decrement direct byte decrement indirect RAM increment datapointer multiply A & B divide A by B decimal adjust accu

241

Logical operations ANL A,Rn ANL A,direct ANL A,@Ri ANL A,#data ANL direct,A ANL direct,#data ORL A,Rn ORL A,direct ORL A,@Ri ORL A,#data ORL direct,A ORL direct,#data XRL A,Rn XRL A,direct XRL A,@Ri XRL A,#data XRL direct,A XRL direct,#data CLR A CPL A RL A RLC A RR A RRC A AND register to accu AND direct byte to accu AND indirect RAM to accu AND immediate data to accu AND accu to direct byte AND immediate data to direct byte OR register to accu OR direct byte to accu OR indirect RAM to accu OR immediate data to accu ORL accu to direct byte ORL immediate data to direct byte exclusive OR register to accu exclusive OR direct byte to accu exclusive OR indirect RAM to accu exclusive OR immediate data to accu exclusive OR accu to direct byte exclusive OR immediate data to direct byte clear accu complement accu rotate accu left rotate A left through the carry flag rotate accu right rotate accu right through the carry flag

2013 MCS Electronics

242

BASCOM-8051 SWAP A Data transfer MOV A,Rn MOV A,direct MOV A,@Ri MOV A,#data MOV Rn,A MOV Rn,direct MOV Rn,#data MOV direct,A MOV direct,Rn MOV direct,direct MOV direct,@Ri MOV direct,#data MOV@Ri,A MOV@Ri,direct MOV@Ri,#data MOV DPTR,#data16 MOVC A,@A+DPTR MOVC A,@A+PC MOVX A,@Ri MOVX A,@DPTR MOVX@Ri,A MOVX@DPTR,A PUSH direct POP direct XCH A,Rn XCH A,direct XCH A,@Ri XCHD A,@Ri move register to accu move direct byte to accu move indirect RAM to accu move immediate data to accu move accu to register move direct byte to register move immediate data to register move accu to direct byte move register to direct byte move direct byte to direct move indirect RAM to direct byte move immediate data to direct byte move accu to indirect RAM move direct byte to indirect RAM move immediate to indirect RAM load datapointer with a 16-bit constant move code byte relative to DPTR to A move code byte relative to PC to A move external RAM (8-bit) to A move external RAM (16 bit) to A move A to external RAM (8-bit) move A to external RAM (16-bit) push direct byte onto stack pop direct byte from stack exchange register with accu exchange direct byte with accu exchange indirect RAM with A exchange low-order digit ind. RAM w. A swap nibbles within the accu

How to access labels from ASM.

Each label in BASCOM is changed into a period followed by the label name. Example : GOTO Test Test:

2013 MCS Electronics

Using assembly generated ASM code: LJMP .Test .Test:

243

When you are using ASM-labels you can also precede them with the !-Sign so the label won't be converted. Jb P1.0, Test ; no period !test : ; indicate ASM label Or you can include the period in the labelname. Another good alternative is to use the $ASM $END ASM directives. Example: $Asm mov a,#1 test: sjmp test $End Asm

How variables are stored.

BIT variables are stored in bytes. These bytes are stored from 20hex -2Fhex thus allowing 16 * 8 = 128 bit variables. You can access a bit variable as follows: Dim var As Bit SETB {var} CLR {var} Print var End 'dim variable ; set bit ; clear bit ; print value

Or you can use the BASIC statement SET and RESET which do the same thing. BYTE variables are stored after the BIT variables. Starting at address 20 hex + (used bytes for bit vars). INTEGER/WORD variables are stored with the LSB at the lowest memory position. LONG variables are stored with the LSB at the lowest memory position too. You can access variables by surrounding the variable with {}. To refer to the MSB of an Integer/Word use var+1. To refer to the MSB of a Long use var+3. The following example shows how to access the variables from ASM Dim t as Byte, c as Integer CLR a ; clear register a MOV {t} , a ; clear variable t INC {t} ; t=t + 1 MOV {c} , {t} ;c=t MOV {c+0}, {t} ; LSB of C = t (you don't have to enter the +0) MOV {lain+1}, {t} ; MSB of C = t MOV {c},#10 ; assign value You can also change SFRs from BASIC. P1 = 12 'this is obvious ACC = 5 'this is ok too B=3 'B is a SFR too

2013 MCS Electronics

244

BASCOM-8051 MUL AB Print acc 'acc = acc * b

EXTERNAL variables are stored similar. Strings are stored with a terminating zero. Example : $RAMSTART = 0 Dim s As String * 10 s = "abcde" ram ram ram ram ram ram location location location location location location 0 1 2 3 4 5 = = = = = = a b c d e #0

'reserve 10 bytes + 1 for string terminator 'assign string constant to string 'first memory location

External variables must be accessed somewhat different. Dim T as XRAM Byte mov dptr,#{T} mov a,#65 movx @dptr,a Print T

; address of T to datapointer ; place A into acc ; move to external memory ; print it from basic

Dim T1 as XRAM Integer mov dptr,#{T1} ; set datapointer mov a,#65 ; place A into acc (LSB) movx @dptr,a ; move to external memory inc dptr ; move datapointer mov a,#1 ; 1 to MSB movx @dptr,a ; move to external memory Print T1 ; print it from basic

Helper routines
There are two ASM helper routines that can make it a bit easier: PLACEVALUE var , SFR PLACEADRES var, SFR PLACEVALUE assigns the variable, var, to the specified register, SFR. Placevalue 1, A will generate : Mov a,#1 Dim x as Byte Placevalue x ,R0 will generate: Mov a, h'3A ; in this example only of course Where it is becoming handy is with arrays : Placevalue a(x), RO will generate : Mov r0,#h'3A Mov a,@r0

2013 MCS Electronics

Using assembly Rl a Add a,#h'1F Mov R0,a Mov a,@r0

245

These are all examples, the generated code will differ with the type of variables used. You can only assign 1 SFR with the PLACEVALUE statement. This is where PLACEADRES comes around the corner. Placeadres , places a variables address into a register. Placeadres ar(x),A Placeadres z , R0 When external variables are used, you don't need to specify a register because DPTR is always assigned. Dim X as xram Integer PLACEADRES x , dptr or PLACEADRES x Will generate : Mov dptr,#2 Or with arrays : PLACEADRES ar(x) Mov dptr,#2 Mov r0,#h'37 Mov a,@r0 Mov r2,a Inc r0 Mov a,@r0 Mov r3,a Mov r1,#1 Acall _AddIndex Of course these are also examples, the generated code depends on the types and if they are internal or external variables.

Hexdecimal notation
You can also use hexadecimal notation. Example : Mov a,#h'AA Or use the BASIC notation : Mov a,#&HAA

Binary notation
You can also use binary notation. Example : Mov a,#&B10001000

Jumping with offset

You can specify an offset instead of a labelname when jumping. Jb P1.0 , *+12 ;jump forward Jb P1.0 , *-12 ;jump back Jnb P1.0 , *+0 ;loop until P1.0 becomes high

2013 MCS Electronics

246

BASCOM-8051 This also applies to the other instructions where can be jumped to a label like SJMP, LJMP DJNZ etc.

Internal buffer for string conversion

The string conversion routines used for PRINT num , STR() and VAL(), use an internal buffer of 16 bytes. This has the advantage that no stack handling is needed but the disadvantage that a fixed space is used. Of course you can use this buffer. It can be referenced with ___TMP_S1 So when you need a temp string, you can use this buffer. Note that this buffer is only available with the mentioned statements! Example : Dim s as single s = 1.1 Print s 'now the buffer is needed ___TMP_S1 = "Use this space" Print ___TMP_S1

Comment
The ; sign can be used or the BASIC comment sign ' Mov a,#1 ; comment Mov a,#2 'comment

7.2

Internal registers
You can manipulate the register values directly from BASIC. They are also reserved words. The internal registers are : BIT addressable registers TCON P1 SCON IE P3 IP PSW ACC B Timer/counter control Port 0 latch Serial port control Interrupt enable Port 3 latch Interrupt priority control Program status word Accumulator B register

BYTE addressable register SP DPL DPH PCON TMOD Stack pointer Data pointer low word Data pointer high word Power control Timer/counter mode control

2013 MCS Electronics

Using assembly TL0 TL1 TH0 TH1 SBUF P1 P3 Timer/counter 0 low byte Timer/counter 1 low byte Timer/counter 0 high byte Timer/counter 1 high byte Serial data port Port 1 latch Port 3 latch

247

The registers and their addresses are defined in the REG51.DAT file which is placed in the BASCOM application directory. You can use an other file for other uPs. You can select the appropriate register file with the Options Compiler settings Take care when you are directly manipulating registers! The ACC and B register are frequently used by BASCOM. Also the SP register is better to be left alone. Altering SP will certainly crash your application! Bit addressable registers can be used with the SET 216 /RESET bit-variables. Byte addressable registers can be used as byte variables. P1 = 40 will place a value of 40 into port 40.
212

60

statements and as

Please note that internal registers are reserved words. This means that they can't be dimensioned as BASCOM variables! So you can't use the statement DIM B as Byte because B is an internal register. You can however manipulate the register with the B = value statement. Making your own register file is very simple: copy the 8052.DAT file to a new DAT file for example myproc.DAT DOS c:\bascom copy 8052.dat myproc.dat edit the registerfile with BASCOM A register file has a few sections. The following example shows only a few items under each section. The [BIT] section contains all SFR's which are bit addressable. A bit addressable SFR ends with 0 or 8. After the SFR name you can write the hexadecimal address. An optional initial value for the simulator can also be specified. Separate the values by a comma. Acc = E0 , 00 The [BYTE] section contains all the other SFR's. The [MISC] section has a few items: up : here you can enter a short name for the uP. IRAM : the amount of available internal memory (128 or 256 bytes) org : the hexadecimal address where the code can start. This is 3 bytes after the last interrupt entry address, because the last interrupt will have a LJMP to an ISR and a LJMP needs 3 bytes. I_xxx : where xxx is the name of the additional interrupt. The name must be no

2013 MCS Electronics

248

BASCOM-8051 longer than 6 characters. As you can see in the example below the last interrupt T2 has an entry address of 73 (hex). So the org is set to 73+3 = 76 (hex). You only need to specify the additional interrupts. The interrupts for INT0,INT1, TIMER0, TIMER1 and SERIAL are already handled by the compiler. CLOCKDIV : The division factor of the oscillator. By default this is 12 and when you don't specify it, 12 will be used. Some micro processors have a division factor of 6 or 4.

EXAMPLE [BIT] ACC = E0 B = F0 [BYTE] ADCH = C6 ADCON = C5 CTCON = EB [MISC] up = 80552 I_TIMER2 = 2B I_CT0 = 33 I_CT1 = 3B I_CT2 = 43 I_CT3 = 4B I_ADC = 53 I_CM0 = 5B I_CM1 = 63 I_CM2 = 6B I_T2 = 73 org = 76 IRAM = 256 CLOCKDIV = 12

7.3

Initialization
BASCOM initializes the processor depending on the used statements. When you want to handle this by yourself you can specify this by the meta command $NOINIT 98 . The only initialization that is always done is the setting of the stack pointer and the initialization of the LCD display (if LCD related statements are used). You can use the $NOSP set.
100

statement when you don't want the stack pointer to be

All data used for variables like the internal RAM or external RAM, is in an unknown condition at startup. This means that you can not assume that a variables is 0. For example: Dim a as byte Print a End When you run the code, 'a' can contain any value. When you want to be sure the variable is 0, assign it with 0. During a reset, the memory content might be the

2013 MCS Electronics

Using assembly same as before the reset, but again, there is no guarantee.

249

2013 MCS Electronics

Part

VIII

Additional Hardware

251

8
8.1

Additional Hardware
Additional Hardware
You can attach additional hardware to the ports of the microprocessor. The following statements will become available : I2CSEND and I2CRECEIVE and other I2C related statements. LCD, LCDHEX, DISPLAY and other related LCD statements. 1 WIRE bus explanation. 258 More about connecting a LCD display 257 . More about the I2C bus 258

Hardware related commands

The uP must be connected to a crystal. The frequency of the crystal can range from 0 to 24 Mhz for most chips. The frequency is divided by 12 internally. So with a 12 Mhz crystal the processor is clocked with 1 Mhz. Because almost each instruction takes, 1 clock cycle to execute the processor can handle 1 MIPS. When RS-232 statements such as INKEY, PRINT and INPUT are used, TIMER1 is connected to the system clock. So TIMER1 cant be used for other purposes such as ON TIMER1 anymore. When no RS-232 related statements are used you can use TIMER1. The Baud rate is generated by dividing the system clock. When a crystal of 11.0592 Mhz is used, the Baud rate can be generated very accurately. Other crystals can be used too but the generated baud rate will never be exactly 2400 or 4800 baud and higher baud rates are almost impossible. The exact baud rate is shown in the report file.

Clock
The clock frequency is the system frequency divided by 12. With a 12 Mhz crystal this means that every microsecond the register is incremented.

Timers and Counters

The 8051 has two 16-bit timers named TIMER0 and TIMER1. Below the internal representation of timer0 is shown. TIMER0 and TIMER1 are almost identical so you can read TIMER1 for TIMER0.

2013 MCS Electronics

252

BASCOM-8051

Each counter register has two SFRs associated with it. For TIMER0 the SFRs are TL0 and TH0. TL0 is the lowest byte of TIMER0 and TH0 is the highest byte of TIMER0. These two registers make the timers 16-bit wide. The timer can operate as a timer or as a counter. A timer uses the system clock divided by 12 as the source of its input pulses. So it increments periodical. A counter uses external pulses to increment its count. The external pulses are received at alternative pin P3.4 for TIMER0 and P3.5 for TIMER1. The timer/counter can be controlled by the run-bit TR0. You can stop a timer/counter with the statement STOP TIMER0 226 /COUNTER0. You can start a timer/counter with the statement START TIMER0 225 /TIMER1. The timer/counter can also be controlled with the alternative pin P3.2. This pin is labeled for its alternative INT0-input but it can be used to control the timer. When GATE is reset the timer/counter is enabled. When GATE is set the timer/counter is enabled if INT0 is active(low). (provided that the timer is started) The timer/counter can operate in four modes: mode 0 : 13-bit counter. An interrupt is generated when the counter overflows. So it takes 8192 pulses to generate the next interrupt. mode 1 : 16-bit counter.

2013 MCS Electronics

Additional Hardware

253

Mode 1 is similar to mode 0. It implements a 16-bit counter. It takes 65536 input pulses to generate the next interrupt. mode 2 : 8-bit auto reload. TL0 serves as an 8-bit timer/counter. When the timer/counter overflows the number stored in TH0 is copied into TL0 and the count continues. An interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows and a reload is performed. mode 3 : TIMER1 is inactive and holds its count. (TIMER1). For TIMER0 in timer mode two 8-bit timers are available and in counter mode one 8-bit timer is available. See a datasheet for more details.

The timer/counter can be configured with the CONFIG statement. CONFIG TIMER0= COUNTER/TIMER, GATE=INTERNAL/EXTERNAL, MODE=0-3 The first argument is the timer/counter you want to configure, TIMER0 in this case. GATE specifies if external timer control with the INT0 pin is enabled. MODE specifies the timer/counter mode (0-3). So CONFIG TIMER0 = COUNTER, GATE = INTERNAL, MODE=2 will configure TIMER0 as a COUNTER with no external gate control , in mode 2 (auto reload) When the timer/counter is configured the timer/counter is stopped so you must start it afterwards with the START TIMER0 statement. The ON TIMERx statement can be used to respond to a timer/counter interrupt when the timer overflows. When the timer/counter is used in mode 2 (auto reload) the reload value can be specified with the LOAD TIMERx, value statement. Because it is an 8-bit register a maximum time of 255 uS can be achieved. So for a period of 10 uS you must supply a value of (256-10) is 246. To make things easier you can assign the value directly : LOAD TIMERx , 250 will internally be transformed into 256-250=6. This saves you the trouble of calculating the correct value. The COUNTER0 and COUNTER1 variables hold the values of timer/counter 0 and 1. You can also set the timer/counter contents with the COUNTER0 = value statement. Please note that with the LOAD statement, you can only load a byte value into the timer/counter. Because the statement is meant for timer/counter mode 2. Also note that you can assign a value to the timer/counter with the COUNTER0/ COUNTER1 variables. You can not use the TIMER0/TIMER1 in it's place but it does the same thing : assigning/retrieving the timer/counter. Port 3 is a unique port because it has alternative functions. That is you can use it as a port like P3.1 = 1 or SET P3.1 or you can make use of the double function of this port. Port P3.0 P3.1 Alternative function RxD receive data for RS-232 TxD transmit data for RS-232

2013 MCS Electronics

254

BASCOM-8051 P3.2 P3.3 P3.4 P3.5 P3.5 P3.7 INT0 interrupt 0 input/timer 0 gate control INT1 interrupt 1 input/timer 1 gate control T0 timer 0 input or counter input T1 timer 1 input or counter input -

When you make use of the PRINT, INPUT and other RS-232 related statements P3.0 and P3.1 are used for the RS-232 interface. When you make use of the INT0/INT1 interrupts, you must connect an interrupt source to the corresponding pins. A switch for example. The INTx interrupt can occur on the falling edge of a signal or when the signal is low. Use the following statements to specify the trigger: SET TCON.0 RESET TCON.0 SET TCON.2 RESET TCON.2 Falling edge generates interrupt for INT0. Low signal generates interrupt for INT0. Falling edge generates interrupt for INT1. Low signal generates interrupt for INT1.

When TCON.x is RESET the interrupts keep on occurring while the input is low.r When TCON.x is SET the interrupt only occurs on the falling edge. To test if a hardware interrupt is generated you can test the TCON.1 and TCON.3 flags. These flags are set by hardware when an external interrupt edge is detected. They are reset by the RETURN statement of the interrupt service routine or subroutine. TCON.1 must be tested for INT0 and TCON.3 must be tested for INT1. Some uPs have an additional timer named TIMER2 which features TIMER2 has.
289

. It depends on the used chip

Ports and Power Up

Port 1 is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port. Port pins P1.2 to P1.7 provide internal pull-ups. P1.0 and P1.1 requires external pull-ups. P1.0 and P1.1 also serve as the positive input(AIN0) and the negative input(AIN1), respectively, of the on-chip precision analog comparator. The port 1 output buffers can sink 20 mA and can drive LED displays directly. When 1s are written to Port 1 pins, they can be used as inputs. When pins P1.2 to P1.7 are used as inputs and are externally pulled low, they will source current because of the internal pullups. Port 3 pins P3.0 to P3.5, P3.7 are seven bi-directional I/O pins with internal pullups. P3.6 is hard wired as an input to the output of the on-chip comparator and is not accessible as a general purpose I/O pin.

2013 MCS Electronics

Additional Hardware

255

The port3 output buffers can sink 20 mA. When 1's are written to Port 3 pins they are pulled high by the internal pullups and can be used as inputs. Port 3 pins that are externally being pulled low will source current because of the pullups. Port 3 also serves the functions of various special features of the AT89C2051 as listed below. Port P3.0 P3.1 P3.2 P3.3 P3.4 P3.5 P3.5 P3.7 Alternative function RxD receive data for RS-232 TxD transmit data for RS-232 INT0 interrupt 0 input/timer 0 gate control INT1 interrupt 1 input/timer 1 gate control T0 timer 0 input or counter input T1 timer 1 input or counter input -

Writing to a Port P1 = 255 will write the value 255 to the port 1, setting all the pins to 1 so all pins can be used as inputs. P1 = 0 will write the value 0 to port 1, setting al pins to zero. Reading from a Port byte = P1 will read the value from port 1 and will assign the value to variable byte.

Setting individual pins of a Port You can also set individual pins of the ports in BASCOM. SET P1.0 will set pin P1.0 high. P1.0 = 1 will also set pin P1.0 high. RESET P1.0 will set pin P1.0 low. P1.0 = 0 will also set pin P1.0 low.

At power up both ports are high and can be used an inputs. Individual bits can be set to use a port both as input/output. For example : P1 = &B00001111 , will set a value of 15 to port 1. P1.0 to P1.3 can be used as inputs because they are set high.

How to interface the port pins

2013 MCS Electronics

256

BASCOM-8051

The schematic above shows how to connect a LED as an output, a speaker as an output and a switch as an input device.

8.2

Alternative port-pin functions

The AT89S8252 ports have alternative functions. The following table shows the alternative functions. Port pin P1.0 P1.1 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 P3.0 P3.1 P3.2 P3.3 P3.4 Alternate function T2 external count input to timer.counter 2, clock out T2EX timer/counter 2 capture/reload trigger and direction flag /SS Slave port select input MOSI Master data output, slave data input pin for SPI channel MISO Master data input, slave data output pin for SPI channel SCK Master clock output, slave clock input pin for SPI channel RxD serial input port TxD serial output port /INT0 external interrupt 0 /INT1 external interrupt 1 T0 timer 0 external input

2013 MCS Electronics

Additional Hardware P3.5 P3.6 P3.7 T1 timer 1 external input /WR external data memory write strobe /RD external data memory read strobe

257

/ means active low

8.3

Hardware - LCD display

The LCD display can be connected as follows: LCD-DISPLAY DB7 DB6 DB5 DB4 E RS RW Vss Vdd Vo PORT P1.7 P1.6 P1.5 P1.4 P1.3 P1.2 Ground Ground +5 Volt 0-5 Volt PIN 14 13 12 11 6 4 5 1 2 3

This leaves P1.1 and P1.0 and P3 for other purposes. You can change the LCD pin layout from the Options LCD menu. You can select the display used with the CONFIG LCD 125 statement. The LCD display operates in 4-bit mode. See the $LCD 95 statement for operation in 8-bit mode. BASCOM supports a lot of statements to control the LCD display. For those who want to have more control the example below shows how to do so. Acc = 5 Call Lcd_control Acc = 65 Call Write_lcd 'load register A with value 'it is a control value to control the display 'load with new value (letter A) 'write it to the LCD display

Note that lcd_control and write_lcd are assembler subroutines which can be called from BASCOM. See manufacture details from your LCD display for the correct assignment.

2013 MCS Electronics

258

BASCOM-8051

8.4

Hardware - I2C
The design below shows how to implement an I2C-bus. Note that you can select which port pins you want to use for the I2C interface with the compiler settings 58 .

You can also select the SDA and SCL pin with the CONFIG SDA CONFIG SCL 128 statement.

128

and

8.5

1WIRE INFO
The following information is written by Gte Haluza, thanks! Dallas Semiconductor (DS) 1wire. This is a brief description of DS 1wirebus when used in combination with BASCOM. For more detailed explanations about the 1wbus, please go to http://www.dalsemi.com/techbriefs/tb1.html. Using BASCOM, makes the world a lot easier. This paper will approach the subject from a "BASCOMuser-point-of-view". 1wire-net is a serial communication protocol, used by DS devices. The bus could be implemented in two basic ways : With 2 wires, then DQ and ground is used on the device. Power is supplied on the DQ line, which is +5V, and used to charge a capacitor in the DS device. This power is used by the device for its internal needs during communication, which makes DQ go low for periods of time. This bus is called the 1wirebus. With 3 wires, when +5V is supplied to the VDD line of the device, and DQ + ground as above. This bus is called the 2wirebus. So, the ground line is "not counted" by DS. But hereafter we use DS naming conventions.

2013 MCS Electronics

Additional Hardware How it works. (1wire)

259

The normal state of the bus is DQ=high. Through DQ the device gets its power, and performs the tasks it is designed for. When the host (your micro controller (uC)) wants something to happen with the 1w-bus, it issues a reset-command. That is a very simple electric function that happens then; the DQ goes active low for a time (480uS on original DS 1w-bus). This put the DS-devices in reset mode; then (they) send a presence pulse, and then (they) listen to the host. The presence pulse is simply an active low, this time issued by the device(s). Now, the host cannot know what is on the bus, it is only aware of that at least 1 DS device is attached on the bus. All communication on the 1w-bus is initialized by the host, and issued by time-slots of active-low on a normally high line (DQ), issued by the device, which is sending at the moment. The devices(s) internal capacitor supplies its power needs during the low-time. How you work with 1w-bus Thereafter, you can read a device, and write to it. If you know you only have 1 sensor attached, or if you want to address all sensors, you can start with a "Skip Rom" - command. This means; take no notice about the Ids of the sensors - skip that part of the communication. When you made a 1w-reset, all devices of the bus are listening. If you chose to address only one of them, the rest of them will not listen again before you have made a new 1w-reset on the bus. I do not describe BASCOM commands in this text - they are pretty much selfexplaining. But the uC has to write the commands to the bus - and thereafter read the answer. What you have to write as a command depends on devices you are using - and what you want to do with it. Every DS chip has a datasheet, which you can find at http://www.dalsemi.com/datasheets/pdfindex.html. There you can find out all about the actual devices command structure. There are some things to have in mind when deciding which of the bustypes to use. The commands, from BASCOM, are the same in both cases. So this is not a problem. The +5V power-supply on the VDD when using a 2wire-bus has to be from separate power supply, according to DS. But it still works with taking the power from the same source as for the processor, directly on the stabilising transistor. I have not got it to work taking power directly from the processor pin. Some devices consume some more power during special operations. The DS1820 consumes a lot of power during the operation "Convert Temperature". Because the sensors knows how they are powered (it is also possible to get this information from the devices) some operations, as "Convert T" takes different amount of time for the

2013 MCS Electronics

260

BASCOM-8051 sensor to execute. The command "Convert T" as example, takes ~200mS on 2wire, but ~700mS on 1wire. This has to be considered during programming. And that power also has to be supplied somehow. If you use 2wire, you don't have to read further in this part. You can simultaneously "Convert T" on all the devices you attach on the bus. And save time. This command is the most power-consuming command, possible to execute on several devices, I am aware of. If you use 1wire, there are things to think about. It is about not consuming more power than you feed. And how to feed power? That depends on the devices (their consumption) and what you are doing with them (their consumption in a specific operation). Short, not-so-accurate description of power needs, not reflecting on cable lengths Only the processor pin as power supplier, will work < 5 sensors. (AVR, 1w-functions use an internal pull-up. 8051 not yet tested). Don't even think of simultaneous commands on multiple sensors. With +5V through a 4K7 resistor, to the DQ-line, 70 sensors are tested. But, take care, cause issuing "Convert T" simultaneously, would cause that to give false readings. About ~15 sensors is the maximum amount of usable devices, which simultaneously performs some action. This approach DS refers to as "pull-up resistor". With this in mind, bus up to 70 devices has been successfully powered this way. The resistor mentioned, 4K7, could be of smaller value. DS says minimum 1K5, I have tested down to 500 ohm - below that the bus is not usable any more. (AVR). Lowering the resistor feeds more power - and makes the bus more noise -resistant. But, the resistor minimum value is naturally also depending on the uC-pin electric capabilities. Stay at 4K7 - which is standard recommendation. DS recommends yet another approach, called "strong pull-up" which (short) works via a MOS-FET transistor, feeding the DQ lines with enough power, still on 1wire, during power-consuming tasks. This is not tested, but should naturally work. Cause this functionality is really a limited one; BASCOM has no special support for that. But anyway, we tell you about it, just in case you wonder. Strong pull-up has to use one uC pin extra - to drive the MOS-FET.

Cable lengths (this section is only for some limited understanding) For short runs up to 30 meters, cable selection for use on the 1W bus is less critical. Even flat modular phone cable works with limited numbers of 1-Wire devices. However, the longer the 1W bus, the more pronounced cable effects become, and therefore the greater importance placed on cable selection. For longer distances, DS recommends twisted-pair-cable (CAT5). DS standard examples show 100 meters cable lengths, so they say, that's no

2013 MCS Electronics

Additional Hardware problem. They also show examples with 300m cabling, and I think I have seen something with 600-meter bus (but I cant find it again). Noise and CRC

261

The longer cable and the noisier environment, the more false readings will be made. The devices are equipped with a CRC-generator - the LSByte of the sending is always a checksum. Look in program examples to learn how to re-calculate this checksum in your uC. AND, if you notice that there are false readings - do something about your cables. (Shield, lower resistor) Transfer speed On the original 1w-bus, DS says the transfer speed is about 14Kbits /second. And, if that was not enough, some devices has an overdrive option. That multiplies the speed by 10. This is issued by making the communication-time-slots smaller (from 60 uS to 6uS ) which naturally will make the devices more sensitive, and CRC-error will probably occur more often. But, if that is not an issue, ~140Kbit is a reachable speed to the devices. So, whatever you thought before, it is FAST. The BASCOM scanning of the bus is finds about 50 devices / second , and reading a specific sensors value to a uC should be about 13 devices / second. Topology Of the 1w-net - that is an issue we will not cover so much. Star-net, bus-net? It seems like you can mix that. It is a bus-net, but not so sensitive about that. The benefit of the 1w-bus Each device is individual - and you can communicate with it over the media of 2 wires. Still, you can address one individual device, if you like. Get its value. There are 64 ^ 2 unique identifications-numbers. Naturally, if lot of cables are unwanted, this is a big benefit. And you only occupy 1 processor pin. DS supplies with different types of devices, which all are made for interfacing an uC - directly. No extra hardware. There are sensors, so you can get knowledge about the real world, and there are also potentiometers and relays, so you can do something about it. On the very same bus. And the Ibutton approach from DS (ever heard of it?) is based on 1wire technology. Maybe something to pick up. BASCOM let you use an uC with 1wire-devices so easy, that (since now) also has to count as a benefit - maybe one of the largest. ;-)

The disadvantages of the 1w-bus So far as I know, DS is the only manufacturer of sensors for the bus. Some people think their devices are expensive. And, until now, it was really difficult to communicate with the devices. Particularly when using the benefit of several devices on one bus. Still some people say that the 1w-bus is slow - but I don't think so.

2013 MCS Electronics

262

BASCOM-8051

Gte Haluza System engineer

2013 MCS Electronics

Part

IX

264

BASCOM-8051

9
9.1

Supported Programmers
MCS Flash programmer
There are different models of the MCS Flash programmer, but all of them are compatible with the driver software. The MCS Flash programmer is a parallel printer port based programmer. It can only program the ATMEL 89C1051 , AT89C2051 and AT89C4051. Select the correct printer port address before you run the programmer. Be sure to switch on the power supply before running BASCOM.

When you run the programmer, the buffer will be filled automatically with your program data. The programmer works with binary files. The following menu options are available.

Exit
Exit the programmer.

Buffer clear
Clear the buffer. That is, fill it with zero bytes.

Buffer Read from disk

Load a file into the buffer. By default the current program.BIN file is selected. Select a file with the file selection dialog box and press the Ok-button.

Buffer Write to disk

Write the content of the buffer to a file. Note that the file size is 1024 ,2048 or 4096 bytes depending on the chip type.

2013 MCS Electronics

Supported Programmers

265

Buffer read from chip

Read the content of the FLASGROM into the buffer. If the lock bits are set all bytes will return FF.

Buffer Write to chip

Program the chip with the content of the buffer. The chip is erased before the buffer is written to the chip.

Buffer Verify
Compares the content of the buffer with the content of the chip.

Buffer program chip

Erases the chip, writes the buffer to the chip and finally verifies the buffer with the chip.

Chip get type

Retrieves the chip type. AT89C1051 , AT89C2051 or AT89C4051.

Chip Erase
Erases the chip. Lock bits are also erased.

Chip Set lockbit 1

When LB1 is set the chip can not be programmed anymore.

Chip Set lockbit 2

When LB2 is set the chip can not be programmed nor can it be verified (read) Use LB1 and LB2 together for securing your program.

Options LPT1 .. LPT3

Select the printer port the programmer is connected to.

Option Port delay

Because computers become faster every day and the hardware is run by software a delay can be specified for very fast computers. A value of 5 is used on a 486DX266. You must increase the value on faster computers if problems occur. The default is 0, and for best results, 0 should be used.

2013 MCS Electronics

266

BASCOM-8051

9.2

MCS SPI programmer

The MCS SPI programmer is a parallel printer port based SPI-programmer. It is a modified design of Jakub Jiricek's SPI-programmer. (two LED's were added) The programmer can program the AT89S52 which has an extra 2048 bytes built in EEPROM for storing data and the AT89S53. The nice thing about SPI-programmable chips is that the chip can be programmed in circuit. You only must design your application so that the SPI-port pins will not be pulled low. The following menu options are available:

File exit
Will exit the programmer.

Write code
Will program the chip with the current programs binary image.

Write data
Will ask for a file and will write the data to the EEPROM.

Verify code
Will verify the programs binary image with the chip content.

Verify data
Will verify a file with the chips EEPROM content.

Read code
Will ask for a filename and will write the chip content to the file.

Read data
Will ask for a filename and will write the EEPROM content to the file.

Chip reset
Will reset the chip.

Chip erase
Will erase the chip.

Chip set lockbits

Will set the selected lock bits. The following use feedback was received: I have at last found my problem with the SPI flash programmer designed by Jakub Jiricek. My PC's LPT port was set to NORMAL mode in the BIOS. Symptoms include normal reset pulse but very slow progress bar with eventual failure to verify. Correct programmer operation was achieved by changing to EPP (enhanced

2013 MCS Electronics

Supported Programmers parallel port) mode in BIOS. I can only assume that the s/w must be using one line in bi-directional mode. Of course, this "fix" may only apply to my PC.

267

Not recommended for new programmers.

9.3

Blow IT Flashprogrammer
The Blow IT flashprogrammer is a parallel printer port based programmer and can only erase, and program a chip. The programmer works only with the AT89C1051 to AT89C4051 chips. The programmer uses the same interface as the MCS Flashprogrammer, but doesn't support all the features due it's design. So for a description read the MCS Flashprogrammer 264 help. Not recommended for new programmers.

9.4

PG2051 flash programmer

The PG2051 is a serial comport based programmer and can program AT89C1051 and ATC2051 chips only. A nice feature is that the programmer can serve as an simulator too. The programmer works with Intel HEX files only. The following menu options are available:

File Exit
This will exit the programmer.

Buffer read from disk

This allows you to load a binary file from disk. The current projects binary file is always loaded automatic.

Buffer write to disk

This option can be used to save the buffer to disk.

Buffer download
With this option you send the programs' hex file to the programmer/simulator. After it is sent, you can program the chip or simulate the program.

Buffer retrieve
Use this option to load the chip content into the buffer.

Buffer verify
This option will verify the buffer with the chip content.

Buffer autoprogram
This option will erase the chip, download the buffer, program the chip and finally verifies the chip.

Chip get type

To identify the chip you can select this option.

2013 MCS Electronics

268

BASCOM-8051 The radio-button 89C1051 or 89C2051 will be set.

Chip set lockbit 1

Set lockbit 1 so the chip can not be programmed anymore.

Chip set lockbit 2

Set lockbit 2 so the chip can not be programmed or verified/read anymore .

Chip erase
Erases the chip.

Chip program
Will program the chip with the downloaded buffer.

Chip simulate
Will simulate the programmed program. This saves swapping the chip in and out of the target application.

9.5

PG302 programmer
The PG302 is a serial comport based programmer. The programmer can program a wide variety of chips with additional adapters. The BASCOM interface is designed to look similar with the original PG302 driver software. You must select the target chip from the device list. Some chips will enable the memory radio buttons. For example the AT89S8252. You can select the memory-area with the radio buttons in these cases.

Blank check
Will perform a blank check on the chip. That is, every memory location will be checked if it is equal to 255 (hex FF), indicating an un-programmed byte.

Erase
Will erase the chip. All memory locations will be set to 255.

Program
Will program the chip with the current program. If EEPROM-memory is selected, you will be asked for a filename.

Verify
Will verify the current program with the target chip.

Read
Will read the target chip and saves the result to a file.

Set lockbit
Will set the selected lock bits. You must select the lock bits first. The lock bits to set depend on the selected target chip.

2013 MCS Electronics

Supported Programmers

269

Auto erase
When this checkbox is selected, the target chip will be erased before it will be programmed.

Auto verify
When this checkbox is selected, the result will be verified after each programming.

9.6

SE512 or SE514 programmer

The SE512 and SE514 are parallel printer port based programmers. The nice thing about these programmers is that they can simulate the application too. This has the advantage that no device swapping is needed until your application works like you want. The SE512 can program the AT89C1051 to AT89C4051. The SE514 can program larger chips too.

Buffer clear
Will clear the buffer.

Buffer load from file

With this option you can load a file into the buffer. By default the current program is loaded into the buffer.

Buffer save to file

With this option you can save the buffer to a binary file.

Chip Write buffer into chip

With this option you program the chip.

Chip Read chipcode into buffer

This option will read the target device its memory into the buffer.

Chip Blank check

Performs a blank check on the target device. A chip is considered blank if every memory location contains 255 (FF hex)

Chip Erase
Will erase the target chip.

Chip verify
Will verify the buffer with the chipcontent.

Chip autoprogram
Will erase, program and verify the chip. Note that the targetchip will be detected automatic. When the targetchip can't be detected, the menu options will not work.

2013 MCS Electronics

270

BASCOM-8051

9.7

SE-812
The SE-812 from Sample Electronics is a programmer for the aduc812. The programmer is well suited for in circuit programming. Since it is a serial programmer that operates via the COM port, the programming is done with the terminal emulator. When you select the SE812 from the programmer options there will be an additional menu in the terminal emulator. - Erase chip. This option will erase both the code flash and the EEPROM. - Erase code flash. This option will erase only the code flash memory. - Program chip. This will program the chip with the current program. - Auto program. This will erase the chip and program the chip. The programmer works only with version 2.00 of the boot loader.

9.8

Sample Electronics ISP programmer

The simple cable programmer was submitted by Sample Electronics. They produce professional programmers too. This simple programmer you can make yourself within a 10 minutes. And only a few resistors are needed. The operation is the same a for the STK200/300 programmer
274

What you need is a DB25 centronics male connector, a flat cable and a connector that can be connected to the target MCU board. The connections to make are as following: DB25 pin 2, D0 4, D2 5, D3 11, BUSY 18-25,GND Target MCU pin(AT89S8252) MOSI, pin 6 RESET, pin 9 CLOCK, pin 8 MISO, pin 7 GROUND DT104 J5, pin 4 J5, pin 8 J5, pin 6 J5, pin 5 J5, pin 1

The MCU pin numbers are shown for an 8252! Note that 18-25 means pins 18,19,20,21,22,23,24 and 25 You can use a small resistor of 100 ohm in series with the D0, D2 and D3 line in order not to short circuit your LPT port in the event the MCU pins are high. But it was tested without these resistors and my PC still works :-) Tip : when testing programmers etc. on the LPT it is best to buy an I/O card for your PC that has a LPT port. This way you dont destroy your LPT port that is on the motherboard in the event you make a mistake!

2013 MCS Electronics

Supported Programmers

271

The following picture shows the connections to make. Both a setup for the DT104 and stand alone PCB are shown.

I received the following useful information : Hi Mark, I have been having spurious success with the simple cable programmer from Sample Electronics for the AVR series. After resorting to hooking up the CRO I have figured it out (I think). When trying to identify the chip, no response on the MISO pin indicates that the Programming Enable command has not been correctly received by the target. The SCK line Mark/Space times were okay but it looked a bit sad with a slow rise time but a rapid fall time. So I initially tried to improve the rise time with a pullup. No change ie still could not identify chip. I was about to add some buffers when I came across an Atmel app note for their serial programmer "During this first phase of the programming cycle, keeping the SCK line free from pulses is critical, as pulses will cause the target AVR to loose syncronisation with the programmer. When syncronisation is lost, the only means of regaining syncronisation is to release the RESET line for more than 100ms." I have added a 100pF cap from SCK to GND and works first time every time now. The SCK rise time is still sad but there must have been enough noise to corrupt the initial command despite using a 600mm shielded cable. This may be useful to your users.

2013 MCS Electronics

272

BASCOM-8051 Regards, Mark Hayne

9.9

CYGNAL JTAG Programmer

The CYGNAL JTAG programmer comes with the CYGNAL development kit and is also available from www.sample.co.kr All tests were performed with the programmer/evaluation board from Sample Electronics. The Cygnal JTAG programmer is controlled by a COM port. You need to select a free COM port of your PC that is connected to the programmer. When you program the cygnal chip BASCOM will erase and program the chip.

9.10

Futurelec
The Futurelec programmer from www.futurlec.com is an ISP programmer for the 89S8252. All tests are performed with the AT89S8252 board from Futurelec Electronics.

9.11

JPK Systems X-programmer

The JPK Systems X-programmer is a serial comport based SPI-programmer. It is fully optical isolated and so an ideal device for industrial equipment. It supports AVR chips too, but these aren't supported in BASCOM of course so there is only support for the 89S8252 and the 89S53. Since it is serial based, the support is placed in the terminal emulator. After selecting the JPK programmer, there will be additional menu options available in the terminal emulator. All these options can be found under the JPK menu. The transfer between the PC and the programmer is implemented with the Xmodem CRC protocol.

Select device
Use this option to select the targetdevice. You can choose between the 89S8252 and the 89S53.

Erase
Erase the target chip.

Read code
Will read the codememory from the chip. You will be asked for a filename first.

Program chip
2013 MCS Electronics

Supported Programmers Will program the targetchip with the current program.

273

Set lockbits
Will set the lockbits of the targetchip. All lockbits will be set.

Read EEPROM
Will save the EEPROM data into a file. This only applies to the AT89S8252.

Write EEPROM
Will program the EEPROM with a file. This only applies to the AT89S8252. Of course all commands can be typed manually too, but you must set the terminal emulator communication settings to 2400N82 in that case.

9.12

Peter Averill's TAFE programmer

The TAFE flashprogrammer is a parallel printer port based programmer and can be build with the DT004 and DT206 SimmSticks from Dontronics. The programmer can program only AT89C1051 to AT89C4051 chips. Peter also has schematics available on the web so you can build your own PCB. The programmer supports all the usual features except the 'read signature' feature. Thats is why you have to select the used chip yourself from the mnu. The programmer uses the same interface as the MCS Flashprogrammer, so for a description read the MCS Flashprogrammer 264 help. I got some feedback from a user that had problems with his programmer. he added 5K1 pullup resistors to +5V. This is shown in the picture below. The dots (11) must each have a resistor of 5K1 to +5V.

2013 MCS Electronics

274

BASCOM-8051

9.13

STK200/300 ISP Programmer

The STK200 and STK300 are AR starter kits from Atmel. They come with a parallel printer port programmer dongle for in system programming of the chips. This dongle can be used to program the 89S8252 or 89S53. For those who don't have this kit and the programmer the following schematic shows how to make your own programmer:

The dongle has a chip with no identification but since the schematic is all over the web, I have included it. Kanda also sells a very cheap separate programmer dongle. So I suggest you buy this one! MCS also sells a compatible dongle. The following screen will pop up when you have selected this programmer:

2013 MCS Electronics

Supported Programmers

275

You must select the chip you use. By selecting the FlashROM TAB or the EEPROM TAB you can write that info to the chip. When the chip does not have EEPROM memory, the EEPROM TAB will not be visible. When the chip such as the 89S8253, 89S2051 or 89S4051 has USER data, an additional TAB will be shown. This is intended to read/write the user data. When you select auto Flash, pressing F4 from the IDE will program the chip automatic and the window will not be displayed. When Code + Data is selected from the programmer options the EEPROM data are programmed. The STK200/300 is recommended for new programmers.
64

both the Code and

9.14

Rhombus SCE-51
Rhombus developed the SCE-51. A powerful small 8051 micro processor board with on board RAM and FLASHROM and bootloader. In addition the board serves as an in circuit emulator. Transferring your program to RAM goes very fast. Faster than loading it into the traditional FLASHROM. So during debugging it is well suited for debugging large applications. When you select the SCE-51, the following window will appear when you press F4.

2013 MCS Electronics

276

BASCOM-8051

The filename is automatic filled. The original SCE-51 software from Rhombus has much more options and BASCOM only supports programming to RAM and FLASH. You must select the target memory before you click the Program button. By clicking the Erase button you can erase the memory. During programming a status bar will be shown. The baud rate is fixed to 19200 baud. Support for 115200 baud will be added later.

9.15

SE511-SE516 programmer
The SE511-SE516 can be used for the SE511 and SE516 programmers from Sample Electronics. These programmers are serial programmers. They require a COM port.

2013 MCS Electronics

Supported Programmers

277

When you launch the programmer, the current program will be loaded into the memory. You can also use the LOAD button to load a program into the buffer. Reset Load Save Read Blank Erase Write Verify Lock Bits This button will reset the programmer and will determine the used chip. Load a binary or Intel HEX file into the buffer Save the current buffer to file Read the chip flash content Test if a chip is blank Erase (blank) a chip Write(program) the buffer into the chip Verify if the buffer is the same as the chip content Write the selected lock bits

2013 MCS Electronics

Part

BASCOM Misc

279

10
10.1

BASCOM Misc
Error messages
The following table list all errors that can occur. Nr 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Error message BASIC source file not found Code does not fit into FLASHROM Unknown statement Extension expected Wrong variable or variable not dimensioned Two parameters expected No more space for BIT No more space for BYTE No more space for INTEGER/WORD Wrong type (BIT,BYTE or INTEGER/WORD) expected AS expected by DIM , expected Unknown interrupt IF THEN expected FOR, DO or WHILE expected Wrong number of parameters Illegal compare (=,>,<,<>,<=,>=) expected THEN expected TIMER0 or TIMER1 expected DO expected UNTIL expected Illegal mathematical operation FOR expected WHILE expected Variable not dimensioned Source file not found Label not found

100-134 These are internal assembler warnings. Contact MCS Electronics . 135 136 137 138 Too many RAM used Variable already dimensioned Constant must be in range of 1-8 Baudrate not supported with selected frequency

2013 MCS Electronics

280

BASCOM-8051 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 166 167 168 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 9 parameters expected COUNTER0 or COUNTER1 expected. = expected. Maximum of 128 aliases statements allowed Duplicate label Value does not fit into byte No more space for external BYTE No more space for external INTEGER/WORD No more space for STRING Call outside 2048 page range. Use $LARGE to compile this program. Unsupported LCD display Unsupported mode Variable not found or dimensioned Wrong type (BYTE,INTEGER/WORD, LONG or STRING) expected : expected SELECT CASE expected Numeric variable expected (external) LONG expected Value does not fit into Integer Value does not fit into Word Value does not fit into Long * xxx (xxx=length) expected Variable expected Small string expected. Variable not DIMensioned Three parameters expected 1 or 0 expected 4 or 8 expected Wrong value for WATCHDOG Wrong parameter for I2C Byte,Integer or Long expected Variable expected Integer or Long expected Value does not fit into bit Variables must be of the same type

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Misc 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 Illegal operation Value doesn't fit Not supported Illegal operation in PlaceValue Constant or Internal byte or integer expected for index Invalid device Channel not opened Device already open Device was not open Value does not fit into byte IF ... THEN not allowed on same line as CASE END IF expected CONST expected Channel expected (#x) ALIAS already used Word or Integer expected CONST already defined = expected TO expected Jump out of address range RNDDATA variable not dimensioned ') expected '( expected Library file not found Library file already registered ) expected ( expected LEFT or RIGHT expected External routine not found Valid number must be in range from 1-16 Numeric constant expected No SUB found. Already in SUB Wrong mode NOINT expected + must be between {} Address >127, use indirect addressing

281

2013 MCS Electronics

282

BASCOM-8051 999 DEMO allows 2048 bytes of code only

10.2

Compiler Limits
There are some limitations to the compiler : You can perform only one calculation in a formula. Good False a = a * b1 a = a * b1 + c Maximum allowed labels Maximum allowed variable names Maximum number of INTEGER/WORD variables Maximum number of BYTE variables Maximum number of BIT variables Maximum number of STRING variables Maximum number of ALIAS statements 5000 1000 10* 20* 120* Up to available external memory 128

*Depending on the used statements and the used variables of the other types. A maximum of 32 bytes is used internally. This depends on the used statements. The stack uses some space too. So it depends on the used statements how much variables you can use. In the worst case (32+16+8) = 56 bytes are used. You can find out by viewing the report file 48 how much bytes are used by your program. When you have a micro such as the 89S8252 with 256 bytes of internal memory, you can have more variables.

8 1 1 1 1 1

used bit vars will use 1 byte; used byte will use 1 byte; used integer/word will use 2 bytes; used long will use 4 bytes; used single will use 4 bytes; string with a length of 10 bytes will use 11 bytes.

Maximum nesting : FOR .. NEXT IF .. THEN DO .. LOOP WHILE .. WEND SELECT .. CASE 50 50 50 50 25

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Misc

283

10.3

Reserved Words
The following table shows the reserved BASCOM statements. Red keywords can only be used on systems, which can address external RAM memory. ! ; $INCLUDE $NOINIT $NOSP $NOBREAK $BAUD $BGF $DEFAULT $CRYSTAL $LARGE $LCD $ROMSTART $RAMSIZE $RAMSTART $SERIALINPUT $SERIALOUTPUT $SIM 1WRESET 1WREAD 1WWRITE ACK ALIAS ABS() AND AS ASC() BAUD BCD() BIT BITWAIT BLINK BOOLEAN BREAK BYTE CALL CASE CLS CHR() CONFIG CONST COUNTER COUNTER0 COUNTER1 CPEEK() CURSOR DATA DEC DECLARE DEFBIT DEFBYTE

2013 MCS Electronics

284

BASCOM-8051 DEFLCDCHAR DEFINT DEFWORD DELAY DIM DISABLE DISPLAY DO DOWNTO ELSE ELSEIF ENABLE END ERR EXIT EXTERNAL FOR FOURTH FOURTHLINE GATE GETAD GOSUB GOTO HEXVAL() HIGH() HIGHW() HOME I2CRECEIVE I2CSEND I2CSTART I2CSTOP I2CRBYTE I2CWBYTE IDLE IF INC INKEY INP() INPUT INPUTHEX INT0 INT1 INTEGER INTERNAL IS LCD LCDHEX LEFT LEFT() LOAD LOCATE LONG LOOKUP LOOP LOW() LOWW() LOWER

2013 MCS Electronics

BASCOM Misc LOWERLINE MAKEBCD() MAKEDEC() MAKEINT() MID() MOD MODE NACK NEXT NOBLINK NOSAVE NOT OFF ON OR OUT P0-P6 PEEK() POKE POWERDOWN PSET PRINT PRINTHEX PRIORITY READ READEEPROM REM RESET RESTORE RETURN RIGHT RIGHT() RND() ROTATE SELECT SERIAL SET SHIFT SHIFTLCD SHIFTCURSOR SHIFTIN SHIFTOUT SHOWPIC SOUND SPACE() START STEP STR() STRING() STOP STOP TIMER SUB SWAP THEN THIRD THIRDLINE TIMEOUT

285

2013 MCS Electronics

286

BASCOM-8051 TIMER0 TIMER1 TO UNTIL UPPER UPPERLINE VAL() WAIT WAITKEY WAITMS WATCHDOG WRITEEEPROM WEND WHILE WORD XOR XRAM The internal registers are also reserved words (variables) TCON P1 SCON IE P3 IP PSW ACC B SP DPL DPH PCON TMOD TL0 TL1 TH0 TH1 SBUF Note that you can change the internal registers with the Register File from the Options menu.
60

settings

2013 MCS Electronics

Part

XI

288

BASCOM-8051

11
11.1

Microprocessor support
Microprocessor support
Some microprocessors have additional features compared to the AT89C2051/8051. 8032/8052/AT89S8252 TIMER2 289 AT89S8252 WATCHDOG 235 DATA EEPROM 292 Alternative port-pin functions

256

80515,80535,80517,80535 GETAD 152 WATCHDOG 293 BAUDRATE GENERATOR 119 INTERRUPTS and PRIORITY 293 80517,80537 GETAD 152 WATCHDOG 293 BAUDRATE GENERATOR 119 BAUDRATE GENERATOR1 119 INTERRUPTS and PRIORITY 294 89C51+ WATCHDOG 297 PRIORITY 206

ADUC812 CONFIG ADUC812 117 Using the DAC 294 that also contains an example The additional interrupts are : ADCI , I2CSPI and PSMI To enable them : ENABLE
145

ADCI, ENABLE I2CSPI, ENABLE PSMI

To disable them: DISABLE

143

ADCI, DISABLE I2CSPI, DISABLE PSMI

To set the priority to the highest level in addition to the normal priority interrupt sources: PRIORITY PRIORITY
206 206

SET|RESET ADCI SET|RESET I2CSPI

80552

2013 MCS Electronics

Microprocessor support

289

GETAD(channel, prm) where channel is the channel and the prm is a paramter that may be 0 for software trigger only or 32(dec) for trigger by rising edge on STADC too. To use the PWM of the 80552 : Dim Pwp As Byte, Pwa as Byte, Pwb as Byte Pwp = 200 Pwa = 50 Pwb = 0 Do Gosub Pwm Loop Pwm: $asm MOV PWMP , {Pwp} MOV PWM0 , {Pwa} MOV PWM1 , {Pwb} $end asm Return 'set output frequency (0 - 255) 'set channel 0 (a) pulse width (0 - 255) 'set channel 1 (b) pulse width (0 - 255)

11.2

TIMER2
Some microprocessors have an additional timer on board : TIMER2. This section describes the 8032 compatible TIMER2 and is not compatible with the TIMER2 found in the 80C535 and others. TIMER2 is a 16-bit timer/counter which can operate as either an event timer or an event counter. TIMER2 has three main operating modes : capture, auto-reload(up or down counting) , and baud rate generator. When using the TIMER2 interrupt, you must reset the interrupt bit that caused the interrupt yourself in the ISR handler. Capture mode In the capture mode there are two options : 16-bit timer/counter which upon overflowing sets bit TF2, the TIMER2 overflow bit. This bit can be used to generate an interrupt. Counter mode : CONFIG TIMER2 = COUNTER, GATE = INTERNAL, MODE = 1 Timer mode: CONFIG TIMER2=TIMER, GATE= INTERNAL,MODE =1 As above but with the added future that a 1 to 0 transition on at external input T2EX causes the current values in the TIMER2 registers TL2 and TH2 to be captured into the capture registers RCAP2L and RCAP2H. Counter mode: CONFIG TIMER2 = COUNTER, GATE = EXTERNAL, MODE = 1

2013 MCS Electronics

290

BASCOM-8051 Timer mode: CONFIG TIMER2=TIMER,GATE=EXTERNAL,MODE=1 In addition the transition at T2EX causes bit EXF2 in T2CON to be set and EXF2 like TF2 can generate an interrupt. The TIMER2 interrupt routine can interrogate TF2 and EXF2 to determine which event caused the interrupt. (there is no reload value in this mode. Even when a capture event occurs from T2EX the counter keeps on counting T2EX pin transitions or osc/12 pulses) Auto reload mode In the 16-bit auto reload mode, TIMER2 can be configured as a timer or counter which can be programmed to count up or down. The counting direction is determined by bit DCEN. TIMER2 will default to counting up to &HFFFF and sets the TF2 overflow flag bit upon overflow. This causes the TIMER2 registers to be reloaded with the 16-bit value in RCAP2L and RCAP2H. The values in RCAP2L and RCAP2H are preset by software means. Counter mode: CONFIG TIMER2=COUNTER,GATE=INTERNAL,MODE=0 Timer mode: CONFIG TIMER2=COUNTER,GATE=INTERNAL,MODE=0 If EXEN2=1 then a 16-bit reload can be triggered either by an overflow or by a 1 to 0 transition at input T2EX. This transition also sets the EXF2 bit. The TIMER2 interrupt, if enabled, can be generated when either TF2 or EXF2 are 1. Counter mode: CONFIG TIMER2=COUNTER,GATE=EXTERNAL,MODE=0 Timer mode: CONFIG TIMER2=TIMER,GATE=EXTERNAL,MODE=0 TIMER2 can also count up or down. This mode allows pin T2EX to control the direction of count. When a logic 1 is applied at pin T2EX TIMER2 will count up. TIMER2 will overflow at &HFFFF and sets the TF2 flag, which can then generate an interrupt, if the interrupt is enabled. This timer overflow also causes the 16-bit value in RCAP2L en RCAP2H to be reloaded in to the timer registers TL2 and TH2. Counter mode: CONFIG TIMER2=COUNTER,GATE=INTERNAL/EXTERNAL,MODE=0,DIRECTION=UP Timer mode: CONFIG TIMER2=COUNTER,GATE=INTERNAL/EXTERNAL,MODE=0,DIRECTION=UP

A logic 0 applied at pin T2EX causes TIMER2 to count down. The timer will under flow when TL2 and TH2 become equal to the value stored in RCAP2L and RCAP2H. TIMER2 under flows sets the TF2 flag and causes &HFFFF to be reloaded into the timer registers TL2 and TH2. Counter mode: CONFIG TIMER2=COUNTER,GATE=INTERNAL/EXTERNAL,MODE=0, DIRECTION=DOWN Timer mode:

2013 MCS Electronics

Microprocessor support CONFIG TIMER2=COUNTER,GATE=INTERNAL/EXTERNAL,MODE=0, DIRECTION=DOWN

291

The external flag TF2 toggles when TIMER2 under flows or overflows. The EXF2 flag does not generate an interrupt in counter UP/DOWN mode.

Baud rate generator This mode can be used to generate a baud rate for the serial port. TIMER1 can be used for an other task this way. CONFIG TIMER2=TIMER,GATE=INTERNAL,MODE=2

Receive only This mode can be used to generate the baudrate for the receiver only. TIMER1 can be used for the transmission with an other baudrate. CONFIG TIMER2=TIMER,GATE=INTERNAL,MODE=3 Note that TIMER1 must be setup from assembler this way.

Transmit only This mode can be used to generate the baud rate for transmitter only. TIMER1 can be used for the reception with an other baudrate. CONFIG TIMER2=TIMER,GATE=INTERNAL,MODE=4 Note that TIMER1 must be setup from assembler this way. Clock output Some 8052 deviants have the ability to generate a 50% duty cycle clock on P1.0. CONFIG TIMER2=TIMER,MODE=5 The output frequency = (fOSC / 4) / (65536-CAPTURE) Use CAPTURE = value to set the capture register. How to determine what caused the interrupt You can test the bit T2CON.7 to see if an overflow caused the interrupt. You can test bit T2CON.6 whether either a reload or capture is caused by a negative transition on T2EX. Timer2_ISR: If T2CON.7 = 1 Then Print "Timer overflowed" Reset T2con.7 Else If T2CON.6 = 1 Then Print "External transition" Reset t2con.6 End if End If Return

2013 MCS Electronics

292

BASCOM-8051

11.3

DATA EEPROM
The AT89S8252 has a built in 2Kbytes flash EEPROM. You can use this to store data. Two statements are provided : WRITEEEPROM and READEEPROM. WRITEEEPROM var [, address ] var Address Any BASCOM variable name. The address of the EEPROM where to write the data to. Ranges from 0 to 2047. When you omit the address the address will be assigned automatically. You can view the assigned address in the report file. READEEPROM var [, address ] var Address Any BASCOM variable name. The address of the EEPROM where to read the data from. Ranges from 0 to 2047. You can omit the address when you have written a value before with the WRITEEEPROM var statement. Because in that case the compiler knows about the address because it is assigned by the compiler.

Example
Dim S As String * 15 , S2 As String * 10 S = "Hello" : S2 = "test" Dim L As Long L = 12345678 Writeeeprom S Writeeeprom S2 Writeeeprom L S = "" : S2 = "" : L = 0 Readeeprom L : Print L Readeeprom S : Print S Readeeprom S2 : Print S2 End

'write strings 'write long 'clear variables

11.4

AT898252 WATCHDOG
The AT89S8252 has a built in watchdog timer. A watchdog timer is a timer that will reset the uP when it reaches a certain value. So during program execution this WD-timer must be reset before it exceeds its maximum value. This is used to be sure a program is running correct. When a program crashes or sits in an endless loop it will not reset the WD-timer so an automatic reset will occur resulting in a restart. START WATCHDOG STOP WATCHDOG RESET WATCHDOG will start the watchdog timer. will stop the watchdog timer. will reset the watchdog timer.

2013 MCS Electronics

Microprocessor support

293

See also
CONFIG WATCHDOG
132

Example
'----------------------------------------------------' (c) 1998 MCS Electronics ' WATCHD.BAS demonstrates the AT89S8252 watchdog timer ' select 89s8252.dat !!! '----------------------------------------------------Config Watchdog = 2048 'reset after 2048 mSec Start Watchdog 'start the watchdog timer Dim I As Word For I = 1 To 10000 Print I 'print value ' Reset Watchdog 'you will notice that the for next doesnt finish because of the reset 'when you unmark the RESET WATCHDOG statement it will finish because the 'wd-timer is reset before it reaches 2048 msec Next End

11.5

WATCHDOG 80515
The 80515 and 80535 both have a WD-timer. This is a 16 bit timer that can't be stopped! It will reset the system after 65535 uS at 12MHz. START WATCHDOG 'start the WD-timer. RESET WATCHDOG 'will reset the WD-timer.

11.6

INTERRUPTS and PRIORITY 80515

The 80515, 80535, 80517 and 80537 have more interrupt sources and priority is handled different compared to the 8051. Enable interrupts: ENABLE AD 'AD converter ENABLE INT2|INT3|INT4|INT5|INT6 'external interrupt 2-6 ENABLE TIMER2EX 'timer2 external reload Disable interrupts: DISABLE AD 'AD converter DISABLE INT2|INT3|INT4|INT5|INT6 'external interrupt 2-6 DISABLE TIMER2EX 'timer2 external reload Selecting of priority: PRIORITY SET|RESET source , level level can be 0,1,2 or 3.(0=lowest,3=highest) The source can be : INT0/ADC TIMER0/INT2 INT0/INT3

2013 MCS Electronics

294

BASCOM-8051 TIMER1/INT4 SERIAL/INT5 TIMER2/INT6 Note that only one of the pairs must be selected. PRIORITY SET INT4,3 'will set INT4 to the highest priority. When two ints occur with the same priority the first source in the list will be handled first. So when both TIMER1 and INT4 have the same priority, TIMER1 will be serviced first. Look at a datasheet for more details.

11.7

INTERRUPTS and PRIORITY 80537

The 80517 and 80537 have more interrupts and priority is handled different compared to the 8051. Enable interrupts: ENABLE AD 'AD converter ENABLE INT2|INT3|INT4|INT5|INT6 'external interrupt 2-6 ENABLE TIMER2EX 'timer2 external reload ENABLE CTF 'compare timer interrupt ENABLE SERIAL1 'serial1 interrupt

Disable interrupts: DISABLE AD 'AD converter DISABLE INT2|INT3|INT4|INT5|INT6 'external interrupt 2-6 DISABLE TIMER2EX 'timer2 external reload DISABLE CTF 'compare timer interrupt DISABLE SERIAL1 'serial1 interrupt

Selecting of priority: PRIORITY SET|RESET source , level level can be 0,1,2 or 3.(0=lowest,3=highest) source can be : INT0/ADC/SERIAL1 TIMER0/INT2 INT0/INT3 TIMER1/CTF/INT4 SERIAL/INT5 TIMER2/INT6 Note that only one of the TRIPLE-pairs must be selected. PRIORITY SET INT4,3 'will set INT4 to the highest priority. When two ints occur with the same priority the first source in the list will be handled first. So when both TIMER1 and INT4 have the same priority, TIMER1 will be serviced first. Look at a datasheet for more details.

11.8

ADUC 812
The 812 has 2 DACS named DAC0 and DAC1. You can use the CONFIG ADUC812
117

statement to set the DAC behaviour.

2013 MCS Electronics

Microprocessor support The DAC can be powered on or off. DAC0.POWEROFF will power off the DAC0 DAC1.POWERON will power on the DAC1 To force the output of the DAC to 0 volt use : DAC0.CLEAR To let it output the voltage use : DAC0.NORMAL The DAC values can be written with the following statements: DAC0.value = 1024 'or a variable DAC1.value = word The sync bit is reset and to sync the DAC with the supplied values use : DAC.SYNC Note that the SYNC method operates on both DACS and so there is no 0 or 1 specified! All the previous methods shown can work with 0 for DAC0 or 1 for DAC1. See the aduc812.bas example: '--------------------------------------------------------------------' ' ' ADCU812.bas (c) 2000 MCS Electronics Note that the support for this chip is untested Any feedback appreciated!

295

'--------------------------------------------------------------------'Use this dat file $regfile = "812.dat" 'configure ADC Config Aduc812 = Adcon , Mode = Normal , Clock = 1 , Aquisition = 1 , Timer2 = Disabled , Extrig = Disabled 'configure DACS Config Aduc812 = Dac , Mode = 12 , Range1 = Vref , Range0 = Vref , Clear0 = False , Sync = Enabled , Power0 = On , Power1 = Off Declare Sub Write_ebyte Declare Sub Read_ebyte 'dim variables

2013 MCS Electronics

296

BASCOM-8051 Dim Wdac As Word Dim Adc As Word Dim Eeadr As Word , Eebyte As Byte , Page As Word 'get value from adc channel 0 'note that simulator will halt until you make the adccon2 bit 4 zero. Adc = Getad(0) 'enable dac0 by powering it on Dac0.poweron '0V to output of dac0 Dac0.clear 'put voltage into dacs Dac0.value = 12 Dac1.value = 500 'dac0 was 0V but must work normal now Dac0.normal 'and after setting the value(s) the dacs must be updated with the sync method Dac.sync 'the EEPROM is accessed via pages 'each page is 4 bytes 'to write 1 byte you need to write the whole 4 byte page 'assign eeadr with the address 'and eebyte with the value to write Eeadr = 100 : Eebyte = 5 : Call Write_ebyte Eeadr = 100 : Call Read_ebyte Print Eebyte End Sub Write_ebyte Page = Eeadr \ 4 mov edarl,{page} mov econ,#1 mov econ,#5 Waitms 20 Page = Page * 4 Page = Eeadr - Page If Page = 0 Then 'page ; page address ; read 4 current bytes ; erase page 'wait 20 msecs

2013 MCS Electronics

Microprocessor support mov edata1,{eebyte} Elseif Page = 1 Then mov edata2,{eebyte} Elseif Page = 2 Then mov edata3,{ebyte} Else mov edata4,{eebyte} End If mov econ,#2 End Sub Sub Read_ebyte Page = Eeadr \ 4 mov edarl,{page} mov econ,#1 Page = Page * 4 Page = Eeadr - Page If Page = 0 Then mov {EEbyte},edata1 Elseif Page = 1 Then mov {eebyte},edata2 Elseif Page = 2 Then mov {eebyte},edata3 Else mov {eebyte},edata4 End If mov econ,#2 End Sub End ; write registers ; data register to read 'must be 3 ; data register to read 'page ; page address ; read 4 current bytes ; write registers ; data register to write 'must be 3 ; data register to write ; data register to write ; data register to write

297

; data register to read ; data register to read

11.9

89C51
The 89C51 has an additional PCA interrupt. The priority mechanism is also different compared to a normal 8051. You can set a level in the range from 0-3. PRIORITY SET|RESET source , level level can be 0,1,2 or 3.(0=lowest,3=highest) The source can be : INT0 TIMER0 INT1 TIMER1 SERIAL TIMER2 PCA

2013 MCS Electronics

298

BASCOM-8051 PRIORITY SET INT0,3 'will set INT0 to the highest priority. Look at a datasheet for more details. The WATCHDOG can be started with the statement : START WATCHDOG. RESET WATCHDOG must be used in your program to reset the WD-timer. When it reaches 16384 the chip will be reset. The input to the WD-timer is the XTAL frequency!

2013 MCS Electronics

Part

XII

300

BASCOM-8051

12
12.1

International Resellers
International Resellers
The list with resellers is updated frequently. Please look at the resellers list at the MCS website : http://www.mcselec.com/index.php?option=com_contact&catid=82&Itemid=59

2013 MCS Electronics

Part

XIII

302

BASCOM-8051

13
13.1

Third party hardware

Third party Hardware
There is a lot of third party hardware available. Below you find links to some of the available hardware Grifo , boards for BASCOM-AVR, BASCOM-8051 and BASCOM-LT Rhombus SCE-51 , small 8051 board and in circuit emulator
309 302

13.1.1 Grifo

EXAMPLES BASCOM - BASIC

The content of this page is provided by Grifo. As following you can find a wide range of demo programs.The programs have been realized to be used on a well-known hardware, as the K51-AVR or the DEB-01, etc. in order to avoid any doubts about the interpretation of the results. The demo programs are well documented in order to allow a fast approach for anybody.In addition to that, being the same demoes written in different languages, it is possible to get an efficient comparison both for Quality and Speed terms. INDEX BASIC Examples - \BASCOM-LT

2013 MCS Electronics

Third party hardware Examples - \BASCOM-8051 Examples - \BASCOM-AVR

303

SHORT PROGRAM DESCRIPTION x_AD11 This program monitors one anagogic channel out of eleven, managed by IC12 (TLC2543), visualization of the channel is in hexadecimal format, through T1 and T2 the channel to convert is selected, T1 increments while T2 decrements. The display shows first the channel being converted, then the 12 bits wide hexadecimal value of the channel converted: Before compiling set in menu Option/ Compiler/Misc: Byte End 5F; Register File 89c1051.DAT or 8052.DAT. For use with 8xC51/52 modify the source where the pins used are described replacing pins for 89c1051 with pins for 8xc51. x_AD4 This program monitors one analogue channel out of four, managed by IC12 (PCF8591), visualization of the channel is in hexadecimal format, through T1 the channel to convert is selected: Whenever a key is pressed, an acoustic signal is emitted. Display DY1 shows the channel to convert, while displays DY3 and DY4 show the converted value in HEX. Before compiling set in menu Option/Compiler/Misc: Byte End 5F; Register File 89c1051.DAT or 8052.DAT. For use with 8xC51/52 modify the source where the pins used are described replacing pins for 89c1051 with pins for 8xc51. x_DA This program monitors one D/A converter channel on IC2 (PCF8591), key T1 increments the value, while key T2 decrements the value which is shown in hexadecimal format the 7 segments displays. Whenever a key is pressed, an acoustic signal is emitted. Before compiling set in menu Option/Compiler/Misc: Byte End 5F; Register File 89c1051.DAT or 8052.DAT. For use with 8xC51/52 modify the source where the pins used are described replacing pins for 89c1051 with pins for 8xc51. x_REE This program allows to read a serial EEPROM on IC4 (max 24c08), with addresses ranging from &H400 to &H7ff, addresses from &H0 to &H0FF are taken by IC7 (RTC PCF8583) while addresses from &H100 to &H3FF are free space. At start the program shows the address where to write, through keys T1 and T2 the value in incremented or decremented. Through key T3 the address is accepted and the value read at such address is shown. Whenever a key is pressed, an acoustic signal is emitted. Before compiling set in menu Option/Compiler/Misc: Byte End 5F; Register File 89c1051.DAT or 8052.DAT.

2013 MCS Electronics

304

BASCOM-8051 For use with 8xC51/52 modify the source where the pins used are described replacing pins for 89c1051 with pins for 8xc51. x_WEE This program allows to write to a serial EEPROM on IC4 (max 24c08), with addresses ranging from &H400 to &H7ff, addresses from &H0 to &H0FF are taken by IC7 (RTC PCF8583) while addresses from &H100 to &H3FF are free space. At start the program shows the address where to write, through keys T1 and T2 the value in incremented or decremented. Through key T3 the address is accepted, then the value to write is selected through T1 and T2, as last press key T3 to write. Whenever a key is pressed, an acoustic signal is emitted. After the operation is terminated the selected address and the written data are shown one after the other. Before compiling set in menu Option/Compiler/Misc: Byte End 5F; Register File 89c1051.DAT or 8052.DAT. For use with 8xC51/52 modify the source where the pins used are described replacing pins for 89c1051 with pins for 8xc51. x_LCD This program allows to manage an alphanumeric LCD featuring a number rows and columns definable by User. The display must be connected to CN5 following the connections shown in the diagram of K51-AVR page 4 of 4. Before compiling select in menu Option/Compiler/Misc/ : Byte End 5F, Register File REG51.DAT In menu Option/ LCD select: Db4 = P1.5 , Db5 = P1.6 , Db6 = P1.7 , Db7 = P1.2 , E = P1.4 , Rs = P1.3 x_PPI This program shows, in hexadecimal format, the status of the eight lines connected to IC1 (PCF8547A9). Before compiling set in menu Option/Compiler/Misc: Byte End 5F; Register File 89c1051.DAT or 8052.DAT. For use with 8xC51/52 modify the source where the pins used are described replacing pins for 89c1051 with pins for 8xc51. x_PPO This program activates sequentially one at a time all the 8 lines connected to IC1 (PCF8574A). Before compiling set in menu Option/Compiler/Misc: Byte End 5F; Register File 89c1051.DAT or 8052.DAT. For use with 8xC51/52 modify the source where the pins used are described replacing pins for 89c1051 with pins for 8xc51.

2013 MCS Electronics

Third party hardware x_PPO2

305

This program turns on in sequence the 16 TTL lines available on connector CN3. Before compiling select in menu Option/Compiler/Misc/ : Byte End 5F; Register File 8052.DAT x_RTC This program allows you to show the RTC or Real Time Clock on IC7 (PCF8583) to the four 7 segments displays: To set the RTC values keys T2 and T3 are used, in detail key T2 increments the hours and T3 increments the minutes. Whenever one of the two keys is pressed the seconds are reset. Key T1 switches between visualization of seconds and hours. Whenever a key is pressed, an acoustic signal is emitted. Date and eventual alarm are not managed: Before compiling set in menu Option/ Compiler/Misc: Byte End 5F; Register File 89c1051.DAT or 8052.DAT. For use with 8xC51/52 modify the source where the pins used are described replacing pins for 89c1051 with pins for 8xc51. x_TER This program reads the temperature measured by IC3 (DS1621) and shows it in centigrade degreases with values ranging from -55 to +125. Before compiling set in menu Option/Compiler/Misc: Byte End 5F; Register File 89c1051.DAT or 8052.DAT. For use with 8xC51/52 modify the source where the pins used are described replacing pins for 89c1051 with pins for 8xc51. BASCOM Examples for boards KND_08 - KND_44 - KAD_08

KND_08 This program allows to manage the board resources of KND 08 card through a menu, using 2 TTL lines driven by a family 51 micro controller. This program is managed through a RS 232 serial line, so it is essential to connect a free COM port of the PC to connector CN2 of K51-AVR. To configure the BASCOM 8051 terminal in menu Options/Communication select the COM port and set Baud Rate to 19200, parity to none, data bits to 8, stop bits to 1. The board used to drive KND 08 is K51-AVR, connections are: K51-AVR ................ KND 08 L1 (pin4 CN6) ----> SC (pin2 CN1 KND08) L2 (pin5 CN6) ----> SD (pin1 CN1 KND08)

2013 MCS Electronics

306

BASCOM-8051 Supply both the boards. Before compiling in menu Option/Compiler/Misc set Byte End(Hex) = 60. KND_44 This program allows to manage the board resources of KND 44 card through a menu, using 2 TTL lines driven by a family 51 micro controller. This program is managed through a RS 232 serial line, so it is essential to connect a free COM port of the PC to connector CN2 of K51-AVR. To configure the BASCOM 8051 terminal in menu Options/Communication select the COM port and set Baud Rate to 19200, parity to none, databits to 8, stopbits to 1. The board used to drive KND 44 is K51-AVR, connections are. K51-AVR .................. KND 44 L1 (pin4 CN6) ----> SC (pin2 CN1 KND44) L2 (pin5 CN6) ----> SD (pin1 CN1 KND44) Supply both the boards. Before compiling in menu Option/Compiler/Misc set Byte End(Hex) = 60. KAD_08 This program manages a sliding alphanumeric message on eight 14-segments displays, installed on KAD 08 board, through 2 TTL signals driveb by a micro controller of family 51. The master board is K51-AVR which must be connected to KAD 08 as follows: K51-AVR ........... KAD 08 L1 (pin4 CN6) ----> SC (pin2 CN1 KAD08) L2 (pin5 CN6) ----> SD (pin1 CN1 KAD08) Supply both the boards. Before compiling in menu Option/Compiler/Misc set Byte End(Hex) = 70. KAD_08_2 This program allows to manage the resources on the KAD 08 board through a menu and 2 TTL lines driven by a micro controller of the 51 family. This program is controlled through the RS 232 serial line so it is essential to connect a free COM port on the PC to the connector CN2 of K51-AVR. Configure the BASCOM 8051 terminal using menu Option/Communication, select the COM port and set baud rate to 19200, parity to none, data bits to 8 and stop bits to 1. The master board is K51-AVR which must be connected to KAD 08 as follows: K51-AVR ........... KAD 08 L1 (pin4 CN6) ----> SC (pin2 CN1 KAD08) L2 (pin5 CN6) ----> SD (pin1 CN1 KAD08) Supply both the boards. Before compiling in menu Option/Compiler/Misc set Byte End(Hex) = 50.

2013 MCS Electronics

Third party hardware EXAMPLEs BASCOM-LT for K51-AVR.

307

K51-AVR DEMO_AD11, DEMO_AD4, DEMO_DA, DEMO_REE, DEMO_WEE, DEMO_LCD, DEMO_PPI, DEMO_PPI1, DEMO_PPO, DEMO_PPO1, DEMO_PPO2, DEMO_RTC, DEMO_TER, BASCOM-LT Examples for boards KND_08 - KND_44 - KAD_08

KND_08, KND_44, KAD_08

EXAMPLEs BASCOM-8051 for K51-AVR..

K51-AVR 51_AD11, 51_AD4, 51_DA, 51_REE, 51_WEE, 51_PPI, 51_PPO, 51_RTC, 51_TER GPC F2 F2_AD11, F2_AD4, F2_DA, F2_REE, F2_WEE, F2_PPI, F2_PPO, F2_RTC, F2_TER BASCOM-8051 Examples for boards KND_08 - KND_44 - KAD_08

2013 MCS Electronics

308

BASCOM-8051 KND_08, KND_44, KAD_08, KAD_08_2 GPC F2 F2_KND_08, F2_KND_44, F2_KAD_08, F2_KND_08_2 EXAMPLEs BASCOM-AVR for K51-AVR.

K51-AVR DEMO_AD11, DEMO_AD4, DEMO_DA, DEMO_REE, DEMO_WEE, DEMO_PPI, DEMO_PPO, DEMO_RTC, DEMO_TER BASCOM-AVR Examples for boards KND_08 - KND_44 - KAD_08

KND_08, KND_44, KAD_08 Page up-dated at June 7st, 2000 GRIFO Via dell'Artigiano, 8/6 40016 San Giorgio di Piano Bologna ITALY Tel: +39 051 892.052 (4 lines) FAX: +39 051 893.661 E-mail: for commercial communications [email protected] for technical communications [email protected] for general communications [email protected]

2013 MCS Electronics

Third party hardware

309

13.1.2 Rhombus
Rhombus developed the SCE-51. A powerful small 8051 micro processor board with on board RAM and FLASHROM and bootloader. In addition the board serves as an in circuit emulator. Transferring your program to RAM goes very fast. Faster than loading it into the traditional FLASHROM. So during debugging it is well suited for debugging large applications. There are many possibilities with this board and you have to look at www. rhombusinc.com for all the details. A picture of the board is included here: Since the help file must be kept small, the quality of the picture is poor.

2013 MCS Electronics

310

BASCOM-8051

A bootloader is integrated into BASCOM. Select the Rhombus SCE-51 programmer to enable it.

2013 MCS Electronics

Index

311

Index
-##ELSE 81 #ENDIF 82 #IF 80

1WRESET 83 1WSEARCHFIRST 1WSEARCHNEXT 1WWRITE 83

85 87

-88032_Alternative port-pin functions 8032_TIMER2 289 80515_WATCHDOG 293 89C51 297 256

-$$BAUD 89 $BGF 90 $CRYSTAL 92 $DEFAULT XRAM 92 $END ASM 88 $EXTERNAL 93 $INCLUDE 93 $IRAMSTART 94 $LARGE 94 $LCD 95, 97 $LCDRS 96 $LIB 95 $NOBREAK 97 $NOINIT 98 $NONAN 98 $NONULL 99, 136 $NORAMCLEAR 99 $NOSP 100 $OBJ 100 $RAMSIZE 101 $RAMSTART 103 $RAMTRON 101 $REGFILE 104 $ROMSTART 104 $SERIALINPUT 105 $SERIALINPUT2LCD 105 $SERIALOUTPUT 106 $SIM 107 $TIMEOUT 107 $WAIT 108

-AABS 109 Additional Hardware 251 ALIAS 108 ASC 110 AT898252 WATCHDOG 292 AVG 110

-BBASCOM 38 BASCOM statements 77 BAUD 111 BCD 112 BITWAIT 112 Blow IT Flashprogrammer 267 BREAK 113 BROWSE001e 144

-CCALL 113 CASE 216 CHR 114 CLOSE 198 CLS 115 Compiler Limits 282 CONFIG 116 CONFIG 1WIRE 117 CONFIG ADUC812 117 CONFIG BAUD 119 CONFIG BAUD1 119 CONFIG DEBOUNCE 120 CONFIG GETRC 121 CONFIG GRAPHLCD 121 CONFIG I2CDELAY 120

-11WIRE 258 1WIRECOUNT 1WREAD 83 84

2013 MCS Electronics

312

BASCOM-8051 Editor Keys 46 ELSE 144 ENABLE 145 END 146 END IF 146 ERASE 147 Error messages 279 EXIT 148

CONFIG LCD 125 CONFIG LCDBUS 126 CONFIG LCDPIN 125 CONFIG MICROWIRE 127 CONFIG PRINT 127 CONFIG SCL 128 CONFIG SDA 128 CONFIG SERVOS 129 CONFIG SPI 130 CONFIG TIMER0 TIMER1 131 CONFIG WATCHDOG 132 CONST 116 COUNTER 132 CPEEK 134 Credits 68 CURSOR 135 CYGNAL JTAG Programmer 272

-FFile Close 40 File Compile 47 File End 41 File Exit 41 File New 39 File Open 39 File Print 41 File Print Preview 40 File Save 40 File Save As... 40 File Simulate 49 File Transmit 53 FOR 148 FOURTHLINE 149 FUSING 150 Futurelec 272

-DDATA 136 DATA EEPROM 292 DEBOUNCE 137 DECLARE 139 DECR 138 DEF 140 DEFBIT 140 DEFBYTE 140 DEFINT 140 DEFLCDCHAR 140 DELAY 141 DIM 141 DISABLE 143 DISPLAY 143

-GGET 151, 198 GETAD 152 GETAD2051 153 GETRC 158 GETRC5 160 GOSUB 162 GOTO 163 Grifo 302

-EEdit Copy 42 Edit Cut 42 Edit Find 43 Edit Find Next 43 Edit Goto 44 Edit Indent Block 45 Edit Paste 43 Edit Redo 42 Edit Replace 44 Edit Undo 42 Edit Unindent Block 45

-HHardware - I2C 258 Hardware - LCD display Help About 67 Help Credits 68 Help Forum 68 Help index 67 Help on help 67 Help Shop 68 257

2013 MCS Electronics

Index Help Support 68 HEX 163 HEXVAL 164 HIGH 164 HIGHW 165 HOME 166 LEFT 183 LEN 183 LIB 55 LOAD 184 LOCATE 185 LOOKUP 185 LOOKUPSTR 186 LOOP 144 LOW 187 LOWERLINE 188 LOWW 188

313

-II2C 168 I2CRBYTE 168 I2CRECEIVE 166 I2CSEND 167 I2CSTART 168 I2CSTOP 168 I2CWBYTE 168 IDLE 169 IF 169 INCR 171 INDEX 13 Initialization 248 INKEY 171 INP 173 INPUT 173 INPUTBIN 175 INPUTHEX 176 Installing BASCOM-8051 21 INSTR 177 Internal registers 246 International Resellers 300 INTERRUPTS and PRIORITY 80515 INTERRUPTS and PRIORITY 80537

-MMAKEBCD 189 MAKEDEC 189 MAKEINT 190 MAX 190 MCS Flash programmer 264 MCS SPI programmer 266 Microprocessor support 288 MID 191 MIN 192 MOD 192 MWINIT 193 MWREAD 193 MWWOPCODE 194 MWWRITE 195

-N293 294 NEXT 196

-JJPK Systems X-programmer 272

-OON interrupt 196 ON value 197 OPEN 198 Options Communication 60 Options Compiler Communication Options Compiler I2C 58 Options Compiler LCD 59 Options Compiler Misc 60 Options Compiler Output 57 Options Environment 62 Options hardware simulator 64 Options Monitor 65 Options Printer 66 Options Programmer 64

-KKeyword Reference 17

58

-LLanguage fundamentals LCASE 178 LCD 178 LCD designer 54 LCDHEX 182 LCDINIT 181 70

2013 MCS Electronics

314

BASCOM-8051 48 SHOWPIC 220 SOUND 220 SPACE 222 SPC 223 SPIIN 224 SPIINIT 224 SPIOUT 225 START 225 STK200/300 ISP Programmer STOP 226 STOP TIMER 226 STR 228 STRING 228 SUB 229 SWAP 230 Syntax check 47

Options View Report OUT 200

-PPEEK 202 Peter Averill's TAFE programmer PG2051 flash programmer 267 PG302 programmer 268 POKE 202 PORT 201 POWERDOWN 203 PRINT 203 PRINTBIN 204 PRINTHEX 205 PRIORITY 206 PSET 207 PUT 198, 207 273

274

-TTable of contents 14 THIRDLINE 230 Tool LIB Manager 55 Tool Triscent Converter 56 Tools Export to RTF 57 Tools Graphic Converter 54

-RREAD 208 READMAGCARD 209 REM 211 REPLACE 211 Reserved Words 283 RESET 212 RESTORE 212 RETURN 213 Rhombus 309 Rhombus SCE-51 275 RIGHT 214 RND 214 ROTATE 215 RUNNING BASCOM-8051

-UUCASE 231 UPPERLINE 232 Using assemly 239 Using the DAC 294

-V37 VAL 232 VARPTR 233 270

-SSample Electronics ISP programmer SE 512 or SE514 programmer 269 SE511-SE516 programmer 276 SE-812 270 SELECT 216 Send to chip 52 SET 216 SHIFT 217 SHIFTCURSOR 217 SHIFTIN 218 SHIFTLCD 219

-WWAIT 233 WAITKEY 234 WAITMS 234 WATCHDOG 235 WEND 236 WHILE 236 WHILE.. WEND 236 Window arrange icons Window cascade 66

67

2013 MCS Electronics

Index Window tile 67 Windows minimize all

315

67

2013 MCS Electronics

 MCS Electronics 1995-2013 www.mcselec.com

Making BASIC Easy